Hi îT'* - ,•( B^ hi* ft . ^i.. .->^ Class^lC: 2iii Book- K ^ ^' I «SI ; THE ^i$tet$d!4t $8^ten|. A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY ^mttlf, ém\m^ ^pmlh mi fUm BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Lafg Director of the ^^ Akadetnie fur fretnde Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the '" Meisterschaft College'''' in London, and Principal of the '■^ Meisterschaft School of Practical Linguistry in New York, FRENCH. IX FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. -VQ>' :xv^ NEW YORK : I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. I TERMS. I We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- 1 terschaft System," for its introduction in America under liis own • supervision, and he has opened t lb ||mttr^cliaft |(cI|ool of flradical l^injuistrj FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons o( each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian. or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered b}- return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accomp-iny the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire lo study There are no extra chai-gfs. The price. Five l>ollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two lan^ruages, etc. All exercises and questions must be written on a separate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or reeisten J letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, to »Hd 1-i lity Strrrt. Xr^ T^rk. The Meisterschaft System has been Universally Successful IN Germany and England, and is Enthusiastically Endorsed BY Educators, Statesmen, Editors, and Business Men. FROM the mass OF TESTIMONIALS WE SELECT THE -FOLLOWING : Dr. Bernh. Schmitz, Professor of Modem Philology at the Royal University, Greifswald, Prussia, author of the ^^ Encyclopédie des Philologiscken Studiums der neueren Sprachen:" "Having carefully studied Dr. Rosenthal's * Meisterschaft System' I can bear testimony to its great superiotity over the older methods so far as conversation is concerned. The acquisition of the grammar is also considerably simplified. Of course there is no royal road to learning, but the pupil who will give a fair amount of time to study will, under this system, be rewarded with w NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. T£i-\^^ .t*^ Copyright, i88i, Bv RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL. TO THE FRIEND AND GUIDE OF ALL STRANGERS AND FOREIGNERS, THE REV. CHARLES F. DEEMS, LL.D., . PASTOR OF « THE CHURCH OF THE STRANGERS," NEW YORK, IS RESPECTFULLY AND GRATEFULLY DEDICATED BY THE AUTHOR. The Meisterschaft System. It is a widely known and acknowledged fact that, although our young men and women study German and French for years, frequently under the tuition of able native masters, they very rarely attain any degree of PRACTICAL FLUENCY IN SPEAKING THESE TONGUES. In our times, when international commerce and in- tercourse is so constantly increasing, our schools and colleges must aim at other and more practical results than heretofore were considered necessary. It is no longer sufficient to teach the student the grammatical peculiarities of French and German, and to introduce him into the classic literature of these Ian-* guages ; but the true end and aim of our linguistic education must be to actually speak the modern tongues^ and to really be able to converse in them fluently and idiomatically. ** The usual mistake," says the New York Worlds in an able editorial on the study of modern languages, ** in America, throughout the majority of schools, is that in studying a foreign tongue more actual study is put upon English and a formation of a smooth transla- tion than in building up and acquiring the language in question. But whatever the faults of teachers or of the system, of one fact the parents and public are painfully assured, and that is that after years of study the schol- ars are still unable to speak and write the language, and with difficulty can even read it. Everybody knows how he has been able to repeat pages of gram- matical rules and foreign words, and then, amid his con- gratulations on mastering so much, how some day he has found himself stranded in a foreign land only to discover that he has no use for the rules and words he has learned — that somehow and strangely enough the people have quite a different stock of language." For two, three, and frequently five years the pupils — according to our present false and unnatural systems — study different French and German grammars, man- uals, and vocabularies ; they learn to conjugate and to decline, to parse and to analyze, etc. If a boy will learn how to build a chair his master does not give him chairs to break asunder ; but rather wood to build them with. He does not tear apart, but builds up. So, if one would learn French, or any for- eign speech, his work must not consist of taking a cer- tain amount of French, tearing it into bits, and then building it up into good English, which he already knows, but it must be just the reverse. In our preparatory schools, our seminaries, the best of all our colleges and universities — indeed throughout our whole land, the greater part of the time is spent in this false and absurd way — and the student who takes a piece of Latin, Greek, French, or German, and renders it into the smoothest English, stands first and best above his fellows. It is an utter deception ; for the same student would be quite unable to reverse the process and render the same amount of English into even a passable foreign phrase. In one word, our schools educate philologists and grammarians, but only in rare instances do they turn out practical linguists. Of what use, however, is a perfect knowledge of all granwiatical French rules to the tourist who fails to under- stand the simple utterances of even a raihvay porter, and who after five years' study of the best French gratmnars, can scarcely ask for his common necessities ? To understand the grammar of a language is desir- able, but it is by no means so important as being able to speak the language. As we can never become painters by the critical study of pictures, so we can never hope to make our- selves practical linguists by the mere study of gram- mar. Or to use a still clearer illustration : We may understand perfectly the theory of swimming, but this theoretical knowledge will be of little practical help when we are obliged to take the first actual plunge. These are incontrovertible facts, felt and acknowl- edged not only by almost all learners, but even by the majority of our teachers. THE TASK OF LEARNING A FOREIGN LAN- GUAGE has hitherto been so difficult, so wearisome and produc- tive of so little efficiency, that few persons of mature age have attempted it, however great their need of it either for business purposes or for cultivation. *' These difficulties," writes Dr. Heinrich Schliemanny the celebrated explorer of Greek antiquities, " have now been happily obviated by the ' MEISTERSCHAFT SYSTEM,' which is simply a scientific adaptation of the natural method by which all persons, whether children or adults, educated or otherwise, rapidly and correctly acquire the language which they constantly hear, and which they are instinctively impelled to imitate when resident in a foreign country." HOW THE MEISTERSCHAFT SYSTEM TEACHES. Jacotot, Prendergast^ Bayard Taylor^ and others proved years ago that the Speaking of Foreign Tongues is not a matter of the intellect^ as shown by the fact that children acquire a foreign language much more rapidly than grown persons. They have neither teacher, book, nor interpreter ; they are frequently too young to read or write in their own tongue ; they understand nothing about the prin- ciples of grammar ; they do not think about this or that method of acquiring the language ; yet without thinking at all, in coming either to Calcutta or Paris — they rapidly enunciate the foreign sounds correctly, and in a few short weeks chatter like natives with their for- eign attendants. It must have been observed by every intelligent traveller how the ignorant donkey boys in Alexandria — native Egyptians mostly, who never went to any school — express themselves clearly and sometimes ver}- fluently in both English, French, and Italian ; sometimes even in Greek and Turkish. In spite of their uncultiva- ted intelligence, the natural and wonderfully subtle pow- er of imitation does for them what a longcourse of gram- matical study fails to do for the educated and refined. These facts must show to the most casual observer that some natural laws exist governing the mode by which foreign languages are acquired, and which should be scientifically considered and made useful for practical purposes. ALL SCIENCE IS BUT THE SEARCHING OUT OF NATURAL LAWS. The greatest scientific results have originated by the careful observation of some very simple and com- monplace occurrence, which has itself directly illus- trated some great unchangeable natural law. The fall of an apple, the steam of a boiling kettle, have conferred untold blessings upon mankind, and yet apples innumerable had fallen before Newton's time. " The careful observation of * the lisp of children and their earliest words'— or rather the common and natural process by which human beings master the powers of speech, has" — to quote the language of the celebrated philologist Professor Bernhard Schniitz — " produced a system by which we can rapidly acquire other tongues, and which has really created a new science — that of Linguistry^ which must not be con- founded with Philology." Now in what way do children — and we might add adults — learn to master a foreign language when resident in a for- eign country ? At first, the mind gets entirely confused by the multiplicity of foreign sounds which it hears contin- ually uttered without possessing the ability of grasping what is said. In the course of a few weeks, however, the ear becomes accustomed to some of these sounds, and we begin to utter that sentence (not a single noun, for unconnected words are not ianguagé)^ which we have heard most frequently used by the persons about us. This sentence is usually relative to our most urgent necessity ; a common object, water, food, towels, or a railway ticket. In a little while a new necessity arises. We use again the same sentence — not knowing any other — altered only by the substitution or addition of a new noun, adjective, or adverb. For instance, the water or food required may be asked for either hot or cold, at once or later, etc. ; and the sentence is then altered or enlarged by a new word which the attendant — under- standing us — suggests. This new word may have some remote or close affinity of ideas with some other word we know, and after a few repetitions, the ear is so accustomed to it that it becomes a part of ourselves, and is uttered by the tongue unconsciously whenever the necessity occurs. This is the process by which sound becomes a mat- ter of language. Foreign words at first convey no ideas to us, and it is only by constant repetition and use of them that we are led directly to think in them. They are then no longer foreign, but have become part of ourselves, and suggest to us the same ideas as do the words of our native tongue. It is clear that the intelligence has at first but little to do in the acquirement of foreign languages. The truth of this observation will very likely be doubted, for it seems as if all study must appeal to our faculties of rea- son. Yet the experience of any one who has studied the modern languages in our colleges will verify my statement. A college graduate will undoubtedly un- derstand the peculiarities of the French or German grammar ; he will be able to read the literature to a certain extent ; he may even be capable of writing a letter faultlessly and grammatically in these languages, and yet as soon as he tries to converse in them he gets utterly confused and is unable to express himself. How is this to be accounted for ? He can read French and cannot speak it. He can write French let- ters and yet cannot express himself orally. He under- stands French grammar better than a native, and still he cannot give utterance to his simplest thoughts in that language. It is just here where our school-systems are at fault. They appeal to the reasoning power, instead of to the memory. The ear, the tongue, and the memory are almost solely employed in mastering the foreign sounds, and our intelligence, though it superintends the whole process, can only really be said to come into action when the foreign sounds have become our mental and bodily property so fully and entirely that we begin to think in them just as readily as in our own ver- nacular. And this brings me to THE PRINCIPAL MISTAKE OF OUR PRESENT METHODS AND SYSTEMS. Every observer of human nature must be aware of the existence of an unconscious process of thought which is entirely apart from and independent of will power, and which — in speaking our mother tongue — is mainly in- strumental in expressing our wants and desires. For instance, we go into a shop to purchase a pair of gloves. Our conscious thought is occupied in the size^ color ^ and quality of the gloves we wash to purchase. All these different points we readily express ivithout one thought of the ivords to be used. At the very moment of uttering these expressions, our thoughts are often occu- pied with some care or sorrow which is far removed from our bodily necessities. Still, in this absent-minded condition we buy our gloves, pay for them, and proba- bly exchange some civilities with the attendant. This unconscious po^ver of thinking and speaking has so far never been touched upon by philologists and teachers, and only Schopenhauer and Hartmann among modern philosophers have alluded to it. Yet I am fully convinced, by practical experience and by close study of the human mind, that in acquiring a foreign tongue it is the mainspring of all proficiency. Our own tongue is of course flesh and blood to us. We express our thoughts distinctly and clearly without be- ing aware of any mental activity. I allude, of course, only to common, every-day experiences, and not to subjects which require conscious and concentrated thought. 1 1 Now let any one who has studied a foreign tongue for years according to the prevailing methods try to express such a simple sentence as, ** / should like to pur- chase some goods this morning. Would you be kind enough to accompany meT\ It surely cannot be said, when we utter such a trite and commonplace phrase in our own tongue, that we even for a moment realize that any activity of thought is going on in our minds ; but in the very instant we have this thought the tongue unconsciously utters it. Yet, I say, let the graduate of any college try to give this sentence as rapidly in French as in English, and not one in a thousand will be able to do it. He has to think about each single word ; he searches the recesses of his memory for the proper equivalents ; he weighs the different grammatical rules which may or may not govern this construction. In one word, he thinks about his French instead of thinking in French. This is one of the greatest fundamental errors in the present grammatical systems, and the chief cause of failure in learning to speak ; and to this alone it is to be attributed that Latin is no longer spoken by our scholars. I choose this seemingly far-fetched illustration on purpose, as it will give me an occasion to show HOW AND SINCE WHEN OUR UNNATURAL METHODS HAVE COME IN VOGUE. It is an undeniable fact that up to the middle of the sixteenth century Latin was the language spoken^ like a living tongue, in all cultivated and refined society throng out Europe. And how was it taught ? Undoubtedly by word of mouth, since the art of printing was almost Tlnknown, and the old manuscripts were only within the reach of a very wealthy and privileged few. With the birth of the press died the practice of oral teaching.. The teacher gave the living tangible word over to the dumb book ; the frequent repetition of sounds so vital to the learning of a foreign tongue, was lost, and the scholars remained dumb, like the book which they had been studymg. For how could linguis- tic results be expected from the intelligence, instead of — as by the natural process — from the ear and the tongue ? Latin is more generally studied in our times than in the past ; yet who is able to speak it ? It may be argued that, in taking Latin for an exam- ple, I overlook the fact that it is a dead language. But was it not equally dead five hundred years ago ? And yet it was spoken because it was studied in a common- sense^ natural manner. And for the same reason — though they are living tongues — French and Germa?i are not now spoken in our schools^ because they are taught in a false ^ unreasonable.^ and unnatural 7vay. The observation of these facts caused me to investi- gate the subject fully, and to determine in the first place THE SIZE AND CHARACTER OF THE VOCAB- ULARY OF EVERY-DAY CONVERSATION. It is well known to philologists that the ordinary vocabularies of men are quite small ; that children, who are able to express nearly every physical wish, are never- heless armed with oftentimes less than 500^ and sel- dom over looo words. Nature provides the child with some subtle instinct by which he selects no word which is not of absolute and immediate importance. From the first uttered syllables on through his whole little life, not a moment is wasted in learning superfluous words. Similar it is with the vocabulary of every-day life. It has occurred to more than one scholar that if he could only actually determine the extent and nature of these words he would be able to make the acquisition of modern languages a very easy matter. Bayard Taylor^ in his " Views Afoot," has declared himself able to acquire a working knowledge of almost any language ift less than a month, and he goes on to show the character of the words he would learn. , He naturally hit upon this idea ; it was suggested by the very wide experience which he had, and the demand that his travels made upon him for acquiring a great many languages. My own rather extended experience as a traveller and linguist coincides exactly with Bayard Taylor's. In all languages there is what might be called A STOCK VOCABULARY, a quantity of words necessary in all walks of life, understood by all, learned first by all, needed and used by all, and with the great mass of people never increas- ing above a certain number, put variously by scholars at from one to three thousand. The nature of these words is about the same with all civilized nations. The observation of many scholars has done much to determine this. The results of these studies are now 14 beginning to be felt in Germany especially, where a visit to the public schools will convince any one that school- children are no longer learning the interesting facts given in a well-known American grammar, that " the Italian shoemaker has purchased an Egyptian antelope^ ' ' or that * ' the shoes of the Spanish peasa?ii have a golden heel, ' ' or that * * the shepherds rested^ arid the swine and sows grazed.'' German text-books begin to be formed on a more sensible basis. Efforts have been made to select the words of every- day speech, and the results are such that, although still hampered by the influence of the old methods, the German schools are certainly produc- ing the best linguists in the world. The study of foreign languages has been made hitherto as difficult as possible, the memory in addition to the numerous abstruse rules being taxed with many words unnecessary for conversation in its initiatory stage. An exammation of most American grammars, man- uals, conversation books and all the labored aids to this study, will show that the vocabularies are crammed with promiscuous words, which seem to have been drawn out of the dictionaries by some novel system of ** legalized lottery" — not so much with a view to provide a necessary vocabulary as to do reverence to the diction- ary, and give every word a fair chance of representa- tion. I hold that a few idiomatic sentences, containing th^ most necessary words, should be learned in the commencement, en- abling the student to at once begin conversation. It is astonish- ing how naturally and rapidly other words will then be 15 learned, while at the same time the ear is becoming accustomed to the sounds, and the mind begins to think in them. Lepsius^ the celebrated scholar on Egyptian antiqui- ties, limits THE NUMBER OF WORDS NECESSARY FOR CONVERSATION ON ALL GENERAL TOPICS to six hundred. I take about four times that number, i.e.^ 2,000-2,500, founding my estimate upon the fluency of speech usually attained by young men of between 15 and 18 years of age. This number of words appears at first sight absurdly small, but if we remember that with 40 words we can construct 1,024,000 sentences of twenty words each, it will be seen that my estimate is strictly correct. For persons interested in mathematical calculations, I give the following table : From 6 words we can form 8 combinations of 3 words each ; from WORDS. COMBINATIONS. WORDS. 8 16 4 10 32 5 12 64 6 14 128 7 16 256 8 18 512 9 20 1024 10 40 1,024,000 20 It is therefore self-evident what an enormous number of sentences may be formed with 2000 words, and that the V i6 knowledge of them is absolutely sufficient for the com- mon occurrences of every-day life. It must also be remembered that if we really knoiv 2000 words, we will recognize at least five to ten .times as many more which are either derived from or closely related to them. Aided and assisted by the works and the help of many teachers, I have made all possible efforts to select only those words which are and must be always em- ployed in all transactions of our daily life. Certainly, if a man in common life is able to do with 2000 words, it will noi be a difficult matter to acquire his language, provided only these words are rightly selected. Nature never fails to select the proper ones. Men can only do it by long and extensive study. T/ie proper selection of the vocabulary of conwion life is the first distinguishing feature of the ''Mcisterschaft System.* But, highly important as this part of the work is, it must not be forgotten that • UNCONNECTED WORDS ARE NOT LAN- GUAGE, and that in acquiring a foreign tongue we must have a framework, or rather a series of formulae which contain the peculiar constructions of the language in question. This is a very* important point, as each and every language has CERTAIN FORMS OF EXPRESSION, OR IDIOMS, which are entirely and peculiarly its own, and which cannot be literally translated into any other tongue. For example, we all say, "' Hcnv do you do?'* Do 17 what ? What are we • supposed to be doing that we should be asked ** how we do it ".? This mode of saluta- tion is just as peculiarly English as the German greet- ing, " Wie geht es?'' or, literally, ** How goes it?" is in- trinsically German. Yet, in order to master either of these, or any other language, we must learn their peculiar idioms almost mechanically. We must free ourselves from that most mis- leading habit of translating literally from one langitage ifito another^ and must accustom ourselves from tl^e very start to the foreign idioms and constructions. This seems at first exceedingly difficult, and 3^et it is the only practical way in which real mastery of the foreign forms of speech can be reached. Grammatical rules will certainly assist us in so far as to give us a more or less lucid explanation of peculiar constructions and modes of expression, but only in rare instances can they give a logical reason for these peculiarities of lan- guage. For who can explain the involved constructions of the German tongue in a logical manner ? Or who can give a logical reason for the w^ay in which the French handle their pronouns ? Such peculiarities of speech must be received as facts^ and all we can do is to practice these idioms and constructions so fully that they become natural to us, and are uttered just as glibly as the English equivalents. We all know that most grammars plunge the scholar directly into dry grammatical rules, and syntax, and long, tedious, ill-arranged vocabularies. The bulk of the ordinary scholar's time is consumed in learning hundreds of unconnected words, which, though of lit- i8 erary and etymological importance, are proven to be outside of daily or yearly wants, and learned only to be forgotten. " This," says a highly accomplished American scholar in a letter to the Evening Post, " is the complaint of teachers and students everywhere. But now that in the * Meisterschaft System ' a method has been devised^ grounded ofi the laws actually goz'erntng the fiature of * volk ' vocabularies, giving at once sentences formed of these words instead of silly phrases and useless vocabularies, introducing a scholar into an idiomatic^ and ?iot a literal study of the foreign tongue, its benefit and value can hardly be estimated. I believe this is the method to be adopted throughout our schools. We study French, but the soul of our work is in English. We study German, but strive only to make good English from it. And so with Latin and Greek. And any one who has observed the results in our highest and our best institutions feels like hiding for shame. It is the wickedest sham that ever lurked about our life. I believe it will be bettered ; and as I see the ' Meister- schaft System ' applied so sensibly to self-study it seems to me practical that if its author can only be induced to visit America^ it will be possible for hi?n to carry on this work so far that it shall root up our wretched methods and work a reform straight through our schools. ' ' It is an old established maxim that WHOEVER WISHES TO SPEAK A FOREIGN LANGUAGE MUST THINK IN IT; but, incontrovertible and true as this principle undoubt- edly is, the difficulty of thinking in the language itself is almost insurmountable. When resident in a foreign country 19 among persons who speak nothing but their own ver- nacular, we gradually and imperceptibly catch their meaning, and in time become — as we have shown— so accustomed to the foreign sounds that we at last begin to think iij them. But how can this be accomplished in our own land ? How is \}iv\s possible when we are continually surrounded by our own countrymen, and are perpetually obliged to use our mother tongue ? We know that the study of grammar as practiced in our schools does not give us this ability. Oral teaching so called has also been tried, but with very indifferent success. Robertson^ Ollendorff^ Otto, Frendergast, and Jacotot attempted to solve the difficulty, and though the two last-named scholars started undoubtedly with correct ideas, they all failed to give us facility of speech. Prendergasty perhaps the most original mind among modern philologists, worked out a most able theory ; but being himself no linguist, and unfortunately being totally blind, he was obliged to leave the practical part of his work to his assistants, who made — as he acknowl- edged himself to me — a most miserable failure in the compilation of his text-books. My system, though far from being entirely original, combines the good features of all modern methods, and follows at the same time naturels own way as closely as possible. While some grammars teach nothing but theory, I lay the greatest stress on practical mastery. While others give nothing but a number of ill-arranged French or Ger- man conversations, and sneer at any grammatical study, / give the English equivalent, and as much of the grammar as must be known for all practical purposes. While others, again, do not distinguish between the la7iguage of litera- ture and that of every-day life, J give the common vocabulary first, and leave other less necessary words for after-studies. In one word, my systei7i is, to use Dr. Schliemanns ex- pression, * ' a scientific adaptation of the natural fnode of ?nas- tering foreign totigues f and while I gratefully acknowl- edge my obligation to the works of many grammarians, and especially to those of Lehmann, Frendergast, and Jacotot, I claim that ' ' the Meisterschaft System, ' ' so far as any scientific work can be original, is my own, and has been thoroughly tried by myself for more than 14 years, and most successfully used by teachers and scholars all over the Continent of Europe for the last three years. A glance at the first few pages of the lessons will show HOW I TEACH THE STUDENT TO THINK IN THE FOREIGN LANGUAGES THEMSELVES. I give first what I call a foundation sentence, which con- tains a number of idiomatic peculiarities, and is com- posed of about 20 words most necessary for ordinary conversation. As a ?iatrve teacher is not always accessible, I have given the exact pronunciation of each word so clearly and distinctly that no mistake can possibly be made. The student must not attempt to learn the founda- tion sentence by heart, but read and repeat it aloud until it sounds perfectly familiar to his ear, and flows smoothly from the tongue without effort or mistake. Of course he must read the English equivalent of the phrase first so that he may have d^getural idea of its meaning. 21 The foundation sentence is next divided into different parts, 'and having perfectly mastered the prominciation the pupil may proceed to study the meaning of each word^ so that he can follow the different transpositions and varia- tions intelligently. For in order to accustom the pupil to the peculiar for- eig7t constructio?is^ and to makje him fd7mliar with their modes of thought and expression^ I form new and similar sentences, repeating the same constructions and some of the words learned. By introducing some nouns, ad- verbs, adjectives, or conjunctions, the sentences are continually altered and enlarged. Short g7'ammatical rules^ or xaXhex hints ^ are constantly given in the foot-notes, so that the student may under- stand what he is learning, and not simply work mechan- ically, as Prendergast erroneously recommends. Practice and theory must be united. STUDY NEVER TO EXCEED TEN MINUTES AT A TIME. After the learner has intelligently gone through the variations of Part I. he innst 7'ead and re-read them aloud for about 3-5 minutes. This done, the pupil will turn to the English, which, as will be observed, is printed on the opposite page, repeating aloud from it the foreign equivalent as fluently and quickly as possible. Zr/%// lu/s^ the time [le temps]). 9. Why (pourquoi) will you not go to the theatre with my brother (mon frère) ? 10. I should very much (bien) like to go to the theatre with him (lui),hv\\. I have no time (je 7i\iipas le temps), 11. Will )'»ou do it {le) for (pour) me? 12. 1 do not want (je ?ie veux pas) to do it for him. . :;. Will you have it done (or, order it = le faire fain)? i) aV is apostrophed before words commencing with a vowel, as ^=rlëër) this letter (cette lettre)} — 10) I should like to read your friend's letter (=the letter of your friend). — 11) When will you do your shopping? — 12) I should like to make my purchases to-day ; will you be kind enough to accompany me to the shop } Exercise. i) Mon beau-frère ne veut pas aller à Londres (Lon- do7i), — 2) Votre amie veut aller au (to the) concert (con- cert ; pronounce : công-sair). — 3) Pourquoi ne voulez- vous pas écrire une lettre française à notre (our) agent (âh-jâng) à Marseille (Mâr-zë-yë') ? — 4) Je ne veux pas acheter ce gilet. — 5) Quoi ! il ne veut pas acheter ce gilet? — 6) Ma (my) tante (tângt=aunt) ne veut pas acheter cette assiette (âs-syët). — 7) N'avez-vouspasle temps d'aller au spectacle ce soir (s'wo-âhr) .'' — 8) Qu'avez- vous donc à faire que vous n'avez pas le temps d'aller à l'église avec moi ? — 6) Veuillez me dire (dëêr), monsieur, si (?/) l'on prend (long-prâng) les billets à Paris au guichet de ce côté ? — 10) Non, Monsieur, de l'autre côté. — Il) Veuillez lui dire de faire l'habit de madame tout de suite. — 12) Avez-vous faim? Non, monsieur, je n'ai pas faim, mais j'ai grand* soif (or, bien soif ). i) Observe the liquid sound Compare Not^ -^ me^ io 53 Of Decleiision (Cases). There are four cases in the French declension, viz : x The Nominative (le nominatif ). The Genitive or Possessive (le génitif ). The Dative (le datif ). The Accusative or Objective case (l'accusatif ). i) There is only one form for the nominative and objective cases, both in singular and plural. They can only be distinguished by \yi€\x position in the sentence. In order to find the nominative^ we must ask ' Who ' .? ; for the objective ' Whom ' or ' What ' ? Ex. : Le tailleur [\.?i-yç^ûY) fait [i2LY) le gilet; the tailor makes the waistcoat. Who makes the waistcoat ? The answer is : the tailor. Therefore le tailleur is the nominative case, or the subject of the sentence. What does the tailor make ? Answer : the waistcoat. Consequently le gilet is the accusative or the object. The construction of French phrases is, therefore, very simple — viz., subject, verb, object. The subject or nominative precedes the verb, the object or accusative follows it. 2) Th.Q genitive or possessive case replies to the question ' Whose,' ^ of whom^ or '' of which ^} It is known by the preposition de (of) which appears either unchanged or contracted with the article. The contraction takes place whenever de occurs before the masculine article le or the 54 plural-form (for both genders exists only o)ie form, viz.: les). Ex. : Singular : du père (instead of de le père), of the father or the father's. du tailleur (instead of de le tailleur), of the tailor or the tailor's. Plural: des frères (instead of de les frères), of the bro- * thers or the brothers'. des sœurs (instead of de les sœurs), of the sisters or the sisters'. 3) Before the femim'ne article la, however, or before 1', de remains unchanged, as: de la mère, of the mother or the mother's. de la sœur, of the sister or the sister's. de l'homme, of the man or the man's. de l'ami, of the friend or the friend's. 4) The dative ease answers to the question * to whom,' and is formed by putting the preposition à (to) before the article, as : à la mère, to the mother. à l'homme, to the man. Before the masculine article le, and before the plural form les, the dative à le is changed into au (singular ' masculine) and à les into aux (plural, both masculine and feminine). Ex. : au (ôh) père (instead of à le ptre), to the father. aux (ôh) frères (instead of à les frères), to the bro- thers. aux (ôh) tantes (instead of à les tantes\ to the aunts. Table of declension, Singula r. Masculine. Feminine. With the apostrophe. Nom. le {le) la {là) V the Gen. du {du) de la {de là) de V ^ of the Dat, au {dh) à la (^ là) àl' to the Ace. le {le) la {là) Plural. r the Nom. les {lay) the Gen. des {day) of the Z>^/. aux {oh) to the y^tv. les {lay) the Only ^«^ form both for the masculine, feminine and apostrophe. Declension of Nouns. Nouns remain unchanged in the singular. T\\& plural is generally formed as in English, by an addition of a silent s to the singular — viz., le père, the father, les pères, the fathers ; l'ami, the friend, les amis, the friends; la cousine, the (female) cousin, les cousines, the (female) cousins. Table. With the definite article. Singular. Norn, le père, the father. Gen. du père, of the father or the father's. Dat. au père, to the father. Ace. le père, the father. Singular. la mère, the mother, de la mère, of the mother or the mother's, à la mère, to the mother, la mère, the mother. ■-. -">-■ -^ oG Plural. Plural. Nom. les pères, the fathers, les mères, the mothers. 6^^«.des pères, of the fathers des mères, of the mothers or the fathers'. or the mothers'. Z>a/.aux pères,to the fathers, aux mères, to the mothers. Ace. les pères, the fathers. les mères, the mothers. With the apostrophe. Singular. Plural. Nom. l'ami, the friend. les amis S the friends. Gen. de l'ami, of the friend des amis, of the friends or ^r the friend's. the friends'. Dat. à l'ami, to the friend, aux amis, to the friends. Ace. l'ami, the friend. les amis, the friends. The indefinite article. Besides the definite article, there is also an indefirite 07ie for the singular, answering to the English a or an^ viz. : un (eûng) for the masculine, and une (iin) for the fniiinine. Ex.: un oncle (eûn-nong-kl), an uncle ; un gilet, a waistcoat ; une lettre, a letter. The indefinite article is thus declined : Singular (masc). Singular (fem.). Norn. nni^Qûng'^). une (un) a. Gcfi. d'un ''deûng). d'une (dun) of a. Dat. à un (àh eûng). à une (âh lin) to a. Ace. un (eûng). une (une) a. i) Pronounce : lay-zS-mge ; day-za-mgë ; Ch-za-raee ; lay-za- mSë. 2) ' ei'c' is pronounced like our 'ta' in ^ early * only longer. 57 Singular. Nom. un frère, a brother. Gen. d'un frère, of a brother or a brother's. Dat, à un f rère,to a brother. Ace. un frère, a brother. Singular. une lettre, a letter, d'une lettre, of a letter or a letter's à une lettre, to a letter, une lettre, a letter. General Rules. i) The definite article must be employed in French before all nouns which are used in 2i ge?ieral sense or which designate a whole species of objects. The definite article in such cases is not used in English, but must be employed in French, as : L'homme (lôm), man; la nature (nâ-tiir), nature; la fortune (for-tiin), fortune ; le dmer (dëë-nëh), dinner, 2) The definite article must be repeated before ea substantive in a sentence, as : Bring the salt, pepper and vinegar, Apportez le Ici, \^ poivre et \^ vinaigre (âp-por-têh le sel, le po-âvr ëh ' vëë-nay-gr). The men, women, and children, \x^^hommi les femmes et les enfants (lay zôm, lay fâm ay lay zân fâng). 3) The possessor follows the objects possessed, and Tswx^th^ preceded by the definite article; for instance, />^«? brother's coat^ must be inverted = the coat of the brother, l'habit du frère ; my uncle's letter = the letter of (or from) my uncle, la lettre de mon oncle. I Words Decline (and learn by heart) the following words : Habillement (m.). ( à-béë-yë- mâng ) la redingote {rë-daing-gôt) l'habit (m.) {là-bêë) le gilet (Jëë-lay) le pantalon [pàng-tàh-long) only used in the singular. le chapeau {shà-pôh) plural : les cliapeaux {lay shd-pôh) la cravate (crâvât) le faux-col (/ôh-côl)- la chemise {she-viëëse) le mouchoir {moû-shwoar) les bretelles (f.) {bray-tell) only used in the plural les bas (m.) {bâh) les bottes (f.) (bot) le caleçon {kà-ië-song) le gilet de flanelle (flà-nel) le bouton {boû-toiig) la boutonnière (boii-ton-yair) les gants (m.) (gang) les pantoufles (f.) (pâng-toùfl) la robe la robe de chambre (shàng-br) le jupon (jii-pong) le peignoir (pen-yoàr) Dress. the overcoat. the coat or the dress. the waistcoat. the trowsers. the hat or bonnet. the necktie. the collar. the shirt. the pocket-handkerchief. the suspenders. the stockings the boots. the drawers. the flannel waistcoat. the button. the buttonhole. the gloves. the slippers. tlie dress. the morning-dress. the petticoat. the wrapper. 59 Exercise. i) Why will you not have your coat done at (chez) my tailor's?— 2) Will you please write an English [anglaise) letter (^letter English) to our agent in («) London ? -- 3) Why will he not buy these (ces) collars and pocket- handkerchiefs ? — 4) What will you do with (^^) this (e) à déjeuner ? Voulez-vous déjeuner avec nous ? Voulez-vous du café ou (or) aimez- vous mieux {myeû=do you pre/er) du chocolat {chocolat)? Voulez- vous du jambon (jâng-bong = some ham) pour votre dé- jeuner ? — 6) Il est temps de dîner. — A quelle heure (âh kell eî\r=at what o'clock) dînez-vous"liujour^'hui ? — Où sont (* song ' == are) les couteaux, les fourchettes, les cuillers, les verres et le tire-bouchon (têêr-boû-shong = cork-screw) ? THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full. Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come to consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent with accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will resemble the Bagster Bible, " Fac-simile large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices within the reach of all. This ** Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, including the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the ^pendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de in the ** Bagster Bibles," with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be printed in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King James version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully prepared helps to the study of the revised New Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Popular Cloth Edition— Ready in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.00. Send for prospectus giving full description and prices of finer Bindings. I.K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, 10 and 12 Dey St., New York. COMPANION TO THE ^eviôed pcrôion'of the ^c-w ^côtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on the Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Revision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BÏ À MEMBER OF THE 1MEBICÀX COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revision of the Work and Co-operation of the New Testament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons whi:h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both com.mittees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Committee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, says of this book: " Many persons have expressed a desire that, simultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons lor such changes as will be found in its pages. The -work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted 10 meet this desire Nowhere e'.«e in print can be found a statement so hill and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers. New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers would have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover all the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lost. ... .AH this is set forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligentinterestin the Holy Scriptures, will find this little book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every men.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-classes." "So valuable, interesting and useful is this publication, that we advise even- one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — A'ew Yo7-k Observer. raper, 8vo size, 35 cents ; Cloth, IGmo, 75 cents. ;^*;jc For Sale by Booksellers and Newsdealers, orsent post.ige-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK &. CO., Publishers, 10 & 12 Dey St., N. Y. THE Ébtewtljaft $a$te% A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY ftmlh iut^m, $pattbi mi fiérn BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Laff Director of the '''' A kadeinie fiir fremde Sprachen " in Berlin amd Leipzig^ q/ the ''^ Meisterschaft College'''' in London, and Principal of the *'' Meisterscha/t School of Practical Linguistry'''' in New York, FRENCH IN FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. PART IL NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened lite ffleister^ckft ^cI|odI of |ractical llnjmjtrj FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercises and questions must be written on a separate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, JO and 12 Dei/ Street, 3>tr York. %^t i^mimtk4'^ fgst^w. FRElSrCH PART II. II. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Did not the physician whom we saw in the waiting-room of the Northern Railway-station tell him, that the persons with whom yonr sister-in- law came here from Cologne, bought a house in Church Street ? The physician whom we hare seen at the waiting-room of the Northern Railway-station. i) où is to be pronounced like 'u' in * rude ', only somewhat • shorter. 2) ajike ' a * in ' father '; â is pronounced a little shorter. 3) ïi-êë is to be pronounced like one sound. 4) en is pronounced like ' ea ' in ' early '. only much longer. II. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Le médecin que nous^avoiis vu à la salle le maid-saing kë noû') zâvong vu âh'^) la sàhl d'attente de la gare du Nord, ne lui a-t-il pas dit dât tângt de la gâr dû nôr ne lu-ëë^)âh tëël pâh dëë que les personnes avec lesquelles madame votre kë lay per- son â-vëk lay-këll mâ-dâm vôt toelle-sœur est venue ici de Cologne, ont^acheté bë41-seûr'*) ay vë-nii ëë-sëë de ko lôn-yë ^) ông tàsh'-tay une maison dans la rue de l'église? un may-zong dâng lâh rû de lay-glëëze Le médecin que nous^avons vu à la salle lë maid-saing kë noû zâvong vil âh là sàhl d'attente de la gare du Nord. dât-tângt de là gâr dû nôr 5) The so-called liquid sounds are the most difficult ones in the French language. They are very sweet sounds. But it is almost impossible to show how they are produced. In the above word the ' yë' has a soft lingering sound. TO The physician whom (or which, whai) we have I liave we have thou hast you have he has they have, masc. she has they have,/(?w. (Compare the table of avoir, to have, in the Grammat- ical Remarks.) seen whom we have seen in the waiting-room of the Northern Railway-station. {^Literally : the station of the North.) 1. Did you not see my sister-in-law? (or, Have you not seen, etc. ?) 2. Has he not seen Mr. D. at the waiting-room ? 3. I saw {or, I have seen) the English physician. 4. What (que) have you seen } 5. What did you {or, What have you) see^ at his office {à son btcreau) ? 6. What did he say.? {or, What has he said [dit]) ? 7. What did you buy.? (or, What have you bought [acheté] ) ? 8. Why have you not written {écrit) to the French physician ? 9. When did you speak to Mrs. D. about {de) this affair {cette n, faire) ? 71 Le médecin (le maid-saing) que [ké) (There is only one form, viz. : que, for our relative pro- nouns whom, which and tohat.) nous avons [noïl-zà-vong). ist person plural of: J'ai {jay) nous avons {noû-zà-vong) tu as {tit à h) vous avez {voû-zà-vih) il a (/// âh) ils ont (/// zong), masc. elle a {ill âh) elles ont (/// zong), fem, vu {vu) que nous avons vu à la salle d'attente de (âh là sàhl dàt-tàngt de) la gare du Nord (là gàr dil Ndr), 1. N'avez-vous pas vu ma belle-sœur (bëll-smr)} 2. N'a-t-il pas vu monsieur D. (day) à la salle d'attente? 3. J'ai vu le médecin anglais (àng-lay). 4. Qu'avez-vous vu (kâ-véh voù vu) ? 5. Qu'avez-vous vu à son bureau (âh song bii-roh) ? 6. Qu'a-t-il dit (kà-tëêl déë) ? 7. Qu'avez-vous acheté (kà-vëh voù zâsh-tay) ? 8. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas écrit (pàh zay-crëë) au mé- decin français? 9. Quand avez-vous parlé (quâng tâ-vëh voù pàr-lay) à ma- dame B. (bay) de cette affaire (sët-tàf-fair)} 72 10. What have you done (fait), waiter (garçoîi)? 11. You have checked {or booked, fait enregidrer) my travelling-rug (ma cotcverture de voyage). 12. What is the matter with you ? (Literally : What have you) ? 13. What is the matter with him ? (or, What ails him ? = what has he) ? 14. What is the matter with her? (or^ What ails her) ? 15. What is the matter with your sister-in-law ? 16. Nothing ' is the matter with me ( = 1 have nothing). 17 I don't know (jc ne sais pas) what (ce que) is the mat- ter with me ( = what I have). 18. What is the matter with you ? You do not look well. (Literally : You have not good look, bonne mine.) 19. What in the world (done) is the matter with your brother-in-law } He does not look well. 20. You are right. (Literally: You liave right, ptisan). He looks badly. (Literally: he has bad look, vtaii- vaise mine). 21. Your friend does not look well. Is he ill (malade)} 22. I have a (or the) lieadache (mal à la tête). 23. He has a headache and is obliged (oblige) to keep (garder) his room (= the room, la chambre). 24. Is she not pale (jjdie) ? Yes, Sir, she is looking ill. 25-. Waiter, this fillet (or steak) does not look nice. i) .Yot/ilng is always expressed by two words in Frencl liC— noil, the first of which, ' tu,' iiiust always be placed t. ». \ 73 10. Qu*avez-vous fait, garçon (fay gâr-song) ? 11. Vous avez fait enregistrer ma couverture de voyage [voû zà-veh fay tàng-ray-jîs-tray mâh coû-vèr-tur de voàk- Jâsh) ? 12. Qu avez- vous [kà-vëh-voû)} 13. Qu'a-t-il (kà-têêl)} 14. Qu*a-t-elle {kâ-tèll) ? 15. Madame votre belle-sœur qu'a-t-elle donc (kà-tèll dong) ? 16. Je «'ai rien^ (réë-aiîig). 17. Je ne sais pas ce que j'ai {Je ne say pâh s' ke jay'). 18. Qu'avez- vous? Vous n'avez pas bonne mine {bon mëên). 19. Monsieur votre beau frère qu'a-t-il donc ? Il n'a pas bonne mine {bon mêën). 20. Vous avez raison {ray-song). Il a mauvaise mine {mo- vayz ntëën). 21. Votre ami n'a pas bonne mine. Est-il malade {ay-tëël màh-ldhd ) .'* 22. J'ai mal à la tête {niàhl à là fait). 23. Il a mal à la tête, et est obligé de garder la chambre {ay tô'blëë-jay dé gar -de h lâh shâng~br). 24. N'est-elle pas pâle {pâhî)} Oui {oû-ëe) monsieur, elle a mauvaise mine {mô-vayz mëën). 25. Garçon, ce filet {fëë-lay) n'a pas bonne mine {mëën). verb, as : il n' a dit Hen, he said nothing, or he did not say any-, thing. u 26. Waiter, take this steak away (âtez =■ take off ; away); it does not look nice. 27. Why ; luhat is the matter with you? ' I am suffering with the tooth-ache. {Literally : What have you then "> I have pain \mal\ in the teeth ^aux dents].) 28. My brother is obliged to keep his room (la chambre)] he is suffering with the tooth-ache. 29. My throat pains me. (Literally: I have pain [viaV\\Ti the throat \à la gorge']. ) 30. I should like to go to bed (aller au lit); my throat pains me. 31. Why ? what is the matter with him ? 32. He has the stomach-ache ; he wants to go to bed. (Literally: He has pain in the stomach [an ventre]; he will go to bed.) 33. She feels sick (:=She has pain at the heart [au cœur]), 34. I don't hnoio (je ne sais)^ wh^t is the matter with me; but I do not feel well (= I am ill [mal] at my ease [à mon aise].) 35. I feel sleepy ( = 1 have sleep [sommeil]); I want to go to bed. 36. I am very thirsty (= I have great thirst [biensuif\)\ waiter, give me a glass of water (un verre d'eau). i) All these idiomatic expressions with avoir to iavf, must be very thoroughly studied. The French cannot sav': /am hungry, but I have hunger, &c. I have given the most common idioms of avoir, tohave,\n the above sentences. The following list will be found useful : qttavez-vous, what is the matter with you ? Je n'ai rien, nothing is the matter with me. fai mal à la tête, I bave the head> fai faim {faing), I am hungry. j'ai soi( {s" zi'oâ/),/ am thirsty. fai raison {ray-zong), I am right, y'aîtort (tore), I am wrong. j'ai sommeil {sômmé-yë), I feel sleepy. ache 75 26. Garçon, ôtez (â-^ay) ce filet, il n'a pas bonne mine. 27. Qu avez-vous ^ donc ? J'ai mal aux dents (màll oh dàng). 28. Mon frère est obligé de garder la chambre (shâng-br) ; il a mal aux dents (màll oh dâng). 29. J'ai mal à la gorge. 30. Je voudrais bien aller au lit (ôh léé) ; j'ai mal à la gorge. 31. Q u ' a-t-il donc ? 32. Il a mal au ventre {ôh vdng-tr)^ il veut aller au lit (ôh lëé), 33. Elle a mal au cœur (ôh keûr). 34. Je ne sais ce que j'ai, mais je suis mal à mon aise (je s'wêë mâll âh mon-naize). 35. J'ai sommeil (som-nié-yë) ; je veux aller au lit (Je veû zà-lay ôh léé ). 36. J'ai bien soif, garçon ; donnez-moi un verre d'eau (eûng vèrr dôh). fai mal aux dents {dâng\ I have the tooth-ache. fai mal à la gorge, my throat pains me. fai mal au ventre {vâng-tr'), I have the stomach-ache. fai mal aux yeux {oh z'yeûh), my eyes pain me. fai mal aux oreilles {oh zô-réye), my ears pain me. Compare \}[\& grammatical remarks on the ' idiomatic expressions of 2) I do not know is given either by : Je ne sais pas, or oftener by je ne sais {Je ne say). 76 37- Give me the bill of fare {la carte (ho jour) waiter; I am very hungry (= I have great hunger [grand' faim]). 38 The tailor has not yet (encore) brought (apporté) your coat. 39. Has not the laundress (la blanchisseuse) brought (rap- porte) my linen (Huge) yet ? 40. Yes, sir, she has brought it and I have put it on (sur) your bed (lit). (Literally : She it ^ has brought and I W^ have put, &c.) 41. Did you speak to her when she brought my linen? (Literally : To lier [lui] have you spoken, &c. ?) 42. Did you see him last evening? ( = Hitn^ have you seen, &c. ?) 43. We saw him (= IVe him^ have seen) this morning when he was going (/7 est allé) lo the post offitc (tni bureau cle poste). 44. Did you understand me ? (Literally : Mc ' have vuu understood ?) 45. No, sir, I did not understand yuu ^:^ i nui vou iuivc understood). ï) Tl^e difficulty in the use of the 'conjunctive pnsonal pronouns ' IS in their proper position. We give a table of them on page 102. Observe the followins: rules : ^)The nominative cases ' ;>, /«, it, c/tc, nous vous, its, ctlc^ precede ihe verb, as in English, as : ' I speak, je parle ;' • we go, nous allons/. &c. * b)\n iutenvgative sentences Ù\e\ are placed /wwr.//.7/,/r .iz/.r the verb, ^s par lez.vous f voulez-vous / :tomu.t.it?SLc., while the auxiliary iW vou. does lie? Srr i<: nr>u-r>r ^»r r^v«.-,.«.j ' ctoj'ou, (toes lie? &c., is never expressed, 11 37. Donnez-moi la carte du jour, garçon {Id cart dil jour, gâr-song)\ j'ai grand' faim {grâng faing). 38. Le tailleur n'a pas encore {pàh-zàng-kôr) apporté votre habit {vôt-rd-bëë). 39. La blanchisseuse (blâng-shî-seûzé) n'a-t-elle pas encore rapporté mon linge {pâh-zàng-kdr râp-por-tay mottg laingsJi) ? 40. Oui monsieur, elle Va' apporté et je /'ai^ mis {mêê) sur (sur) votre lit (lêê). 41. Lui avez-mus parlé^ quand elle a apporté mon linge [kâng tèll-ld dp-por-tay mong laingsh) ? 42. L'avez-vous vic^ hier" soir (y air swodr) ? 43. Nous l'avons vti^ ce matin [se màtaing) quand il est allé au bureau de poste. 44. J\r avez-vous compris^ {cong-préé) ? 45. Non, monsieur, je ne vous ^ ai pas compris {je ne voù zay pdh congprêë). c) The dative and accusative cases, me te, lui, le, la, nous, vous, leur^ les, are placed immediately before the verb in a simple tense, and before its auxiliaiy in a compound one, as : Je vous donne, I give you ; il me comprend, he understands me ; je vous ai compris, I have un- derstood you ; il m'di vu, he has seen me ; je leur dA dit, I have told them. , d) In negative sentences ne is placed directly after the subject and before the governed pronoun, as : il ne w'a pas vu ; vous ne w'avez pas compris ; je ne vous ai pas vu ; ne lui a-t-il pas donné? je ne leur ai pas dit ; ne lui a-t-il pas dit ? 46. I did not understand you. You are speaking too {trop) fast {vite). {Literally : I not you have under- stood, &c.) 47. My brother understood him ; he speaks English {an- glais) pretty well {passablmnmt). 48. She is wrong ( = She has wrong 'tort '). 49. Your friend is ( = has) wrong; Mr. N. has passed {or spent, lived) three (trois) years {a7is) in Paris. 50. What do you think of the French language {la lan- gue)? Do you not find it ( = her^) very difficult {difficile) ? 51. Why did you not brush {brossé) my clothes, waiter? 52. Waiter, brush my clothes and black (cirez) my boots. 53. Why did you not bring me my breakfast.' (= Why not ?ne have you brought, &c.) 2 Did he not tell him? Not to him (or to her). There is only om form for both pronouns, viz. : ' /«* * has he I) /ler, because it refers to ' /a ' langue, fem, 79 46. Je ne vous ai pas compris; vous parlez trop vite [trô vëét). 47. Mon frère fa compris ; il parle passablement anglais i^pà-sâ-blé-mâng tàng-glay). 48. Elle a tort {tdr). 49. Votre ami a tort; monsieur N. a passé trois ans {tro^dh zàng) à Paris. 50. Que pensez-vous de la langue {iâng) française ? Ne la> trouvez- vous pas bien difficile (dî-fêé-séêl) ? 51. Pourquoi n'avez-vous pas brossé mes habits, garçon {fuay zà-bêé gar -song) ? 52. Garçon, brossez mes habits et cirez [sëê-ray) mes bottes. 53. Pourquoi ne m'avez-vous pas apporté mon déjeuner {né mâ-vay voû pâh zàp-por-tay mong day-jeû-nay) ? Ne lui a-t-il pas dit ? ne lifiê â-tëël pâh dêë ne-pas (The English negation not is almost always expressed by ne~pas.) lui a-t-il (The " /" in questions is added for euphony, but only in the 3d person singular when the verb which precedes il or eli^ or on [one] ends in a vowel.) 80 has he not to him said; told has he not told him ; did he not tell him ? 1. Did he not tell you to go to the station ? 2. Have 1 not told you to do it at once ? 3. Why did you not tell him to write this letter ? 4. I have told him so (= I it to him^ have told), but he v^ill not do it. 5. Why did he not give you the knives (les couteaux) ? 6. Why did you give him my friend's address? (= the address of my friend) ? 7. Why did you not tell him that I did not understand him ? S. Did you not understand me ? 9. Why have you not told him that we have no time to lose (à perdre) ? 10. Have I not told you that he will not send [cnvoijer) your coat ? 11. Why did you not tell him not' to go to his office? i) When a verb governs tzuo pronouns, they are both placed immediately before the verb, so that the one in the dativi conifs /tst and the accusative follo-ios. This rule applies only to the following pronouns: mr If, it me {ofio me); tele, it thee {or to thee) ; nous le, it us {ori^i us); ivu: 81 ne lui a-t-il pas dit ne lui a-t-il pas dit ? I. Ne vous a-t-il pas dit d'aller à la gare ? 3. Ne vous ai-je pas dit de le faire tout de suite 3. Pourquoi ne lui avez-vous pas dit d'écrire cette lettre? 4. Je le lui^ ai dit, mais \\ ne veut pas le faire. 5. Pourquoi ne vous a-t-il pas donné les couteaux {koû-toh)} 6. Pourquoi lui avez-vous donné l'adresse de mon ami {de mon nâ-7néè ) ? 7. Pourquoi ne lui avez-vous pas dit que je ne l'ai pas compris ( cong-prëé ) ? S. Ne m'avez-vous pas compris? 9. Pourquoi ne lui avez-vous pas dit que nous n'avons pas de temps à perdre {tâ?ig âh per-dr) ? 10. Ne vous ai-je pas dit qu'il ne veut pas envoyer votre habit {kêêl 7îêveû pâh zàng-voâh-yëh vot-râ-bcê) ? if. Pourquoi ne lui avez-vous pas dit de ne pas"^ aller à son bureau {né pdh zà-lay âh song biï-rôh)! lt\ it you {or to you). Ex. II me îe donne, he gives it to me. Je 7'ons /'ai donné, I gave it )'Ou. But observe that one ahvays says : le Ini, it to him {or to her), and le leur, it to them. 2) » pas is ahvays placed together before the infinitive and not separated. 82 12. Why has he done so (= it) ? 13. He did not tell me that one (que Ton) takes (jjrend) the tickets at the ticket-office on (de) this side. 14. Did he not "write to them (leur) that I wanted (je veux) a front room (une chambre dormant sur la rue) (= towards the street) ? 15. Why did you not write to them that we refused {re- fuse) the draft (la traite) ? 16. He wrote me about it (= he me it has written), but I forgot it (= I it have forgotten (oublié). 17. He has not brought me my breakfast. 18. Why did you not bring him his (son) dinner? f ■ 19. Î told him so (==1 it to him have said), but he will not do it. 2Ô. My brother has commissioned (chargé) me to buy him three (trois) shirt-buttons (= buttons of shirt, boutons de chemise). Did I not commission (or order) you to buy my gloves at the French glovemaker's (le gantier) ? Waiter, did you order (=have you made come) a cab (un fiacre) ? 23. The servant (le commissionuire) told me, the carriage (la voiture) is at the door (à la porte). 24. Did you check my luggage {nies effets), and have you given him the check (le bulletin) ? 25. I gave it to him last evening (hier soir), but he mis- laid it (= he it has mislaid, égaré). 21. 22 i) On = one, they, people. For euphony's sake the French say 83 12. Pourquoi l'a-t-il fait (làh-tëêl fay)'^ 13. Il ne m'a pas dit que l'on ^ prend les billets au gui- chet de ce côté {long pràng lay bëé-yëh ôh ghêë-shay dé se kd-tay). 14. Ne leur a-t-il pas écrit que je veux une chambre donnant {dôn-nâng) sur la rue ? 15. Pourquoi ne leur avez-vous pas écrit que nous avons refusé (rëfu-zay) la traite {trait)} 16. Il me l'a écrit, mais je l'ai oublié {oû-ùlëë-ay). jj. Il ne m'a pas apporté mon déjeuner {day-Jeû-nay). 18. Pourquoi ne lui avez-vous pas apporté son dîner (sang dëë-nay) ? 19. Je le lui ai dit, mais il ne veut pas le faire. 20. Mon frère m'a chargé (s/iâr-j'ay) de lui acheter trois boutons de chemise {boù-tong de shë-mëëze). 21 Ne vous ai-je pas chargé d'acheter mes gants {gang) chez le gantier {gàng-fyay) français } 22. Garçon, avez-vous fait venir un fiacre (fëë-àk') ? 23. Le commissionaire {cd-mïss-yô-nayr) m'a dit que la voiture {iwàh-tilr) est à la porte. 24. Avez-vous fait enregistrer mes^efïets, et lui avez- vous donné le bulletin (bill-taing) ? 25. Je le lui ai donné hier soir, mais^il Ta égaré {ay^ gà-ray). que Von, that one ; si Von, if one ; and ou Pon, where one. 84 26. I saw you at the waiting-room. 27. Will you please tell them (viz. : it=:/f). j'6. Of what {de quoi) did you speak to him when you saw him on the platform {au quai) ? 29. I say yes. 30. He says no. 31. What did you say {or, I beg your pardon, what did you say) } 32. Why did you not write to them to send us a new {une nouvelle) collection {collection) of samples {or patterns, cF échantillons) ? ^T,. My brother-in-law speaks French with our tailor. 34. Does he speak French ? {Parle-t-il ; tlie '/ ' is inserted for euphony). 35. Yes, sir, he speaks a little. {Literally: it a little = un peu). 3 that the persons with whom your sister-in-law came here from Cologne, bought a house iu Church Street? 85 20. Je vous^ai vu à la salle d'attente {dât-tàngt). 27. Veuillez le leur dire {veû-yêh lé leur dêêr). 28. De quoi lui avez-vous parlé, quand vous lavez vu au quai [ôh kay) ? 29. Je dis que oui (y7, leaving the others for after-study ; Present^ Imperfect^ Perfect^ Pluperfect^ Future^ Condiiiofial. A UXTLIAR y VERBS. 1. Avoir {a-v^ir) to liave. INDICATIVE MOOD. Prescfit Tense (Présent). J'ai {jay), I have tu as {tii a), thou hast il 1 f.v/ 1 elle J^a e// yd on J t ^// J nous avons (non zà-ronç), we have vous avez {voil zâ-vêh), you have ils^ ) {^'^^) 1 elles^r^"^ |^^^^[s.;//oj they have he 1 she } lias J one 95 Impel' feet {hfiparfatt). J'avais (Jà-vay)^ I had. tu avais [tu à-vay), thon hadst. il avait (êêl à-vay)y he had. . nous avions (noû 'zâ-7>yû77g), we had» vous aviez (vûû zà-vyëJi)^ you had. ils avaient {êel zà-vay), they had. P?'eterite {Défini). J'eus {?u)^ I had. tu eus {tu a), thou hadst. il eut {êêl tt), he had. nous eûmes {noû ziini)^ we had. vous eûtes {jw'û zUt ), you had. ils eurent {êêl ziir)^ they had. Future {Futur). J'aurai {jô-rêh), I shall ^r.will have, tu auras {tii drâ), thou wilt have, il aura {êêl àrâ), he will have. nous aurons {noû zâ-rong), we shall haveA, he will have had. 97 nous aurons eu {noû zd~roiig zïi), we shall have had. vous aurez eu (2'oû zô-rch zii)^ you will have had. ils auront eu (êêl zô-ro?ig-tu), they will have had. 2nd Conditional {Cond. passe). J'aurais eu {jô-ray-zii), I should have had. tu aurais eu {til ôray-zU) thou wouldst have had. il aurait eu {êël ô-ray-til), he would have had. nous aurions eu {noil zô-ryong-zii) we should have had. vous auriez eu {voU zô-ryéh-zii)^ you would have had. ils auraient eu {éél zô-ray-tu)^ they would have had. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD (SUBJONCTIF). Present. Que j'aie {kejay), that I may have. que tu aies {kè til ay), that thou mayest have. ^ qu'il ait {këêl ay)., that he may have. que nous ayons {ke noû zay-yong), that we may have. que vous ayez {ké voû zay-yêh), that you may have. qu'ils aient {këêl zay), that they may have. Imperfect. Que j'eusse {kê jilss), that I might have. -^ que tu eusses {kê til ilss), that thou mightst have, qu'il eût {këët il), that he might have, que nous eussions {ke noil zi/s-yong), that we might have, que vous eussiez {ke voû zils-yëh), that you might have, qu'ils eussent {këêl ziiss), that they might have. 93 Perfect. Que j'aie eu {kë jay u)^ that I may have had. que tu aies eu {kë tu ay-zii), that thou mayest have had. qu'il ait eu {kêél ay-tii), that he may have had. que nous ayons eu {kënoû zayyong zu)^th^\,vf^v[\£iyh2i\Gh2id. que vous ayez eu {këvoû zay-yêh-zii), that you may have had. qu'ils aient eu {këël zay-tu\ that they may have had. Pluperfect. Que j'eusse eu (këjiiss û), that I might have had. que tu eusses eu {kë tu sus-zu)^ that thou mightst have had. qu'il eût eu [këël il tii), that he might have had. que nous eussions eu {kë noû ziis-syong-zii), that we might have had. que vous eussiez eu {kë voû zus-yëh-zù)^ that you might have had. qu'ils eussent eu {këël zuss-t/i), that they might have had. IMPERATIVE MOOD (IMPÉRATIF). aie (ay), have (thou). ayons (ay-yong), let us have (qu'il ait [këëlayl^ let him ayez (ay-yëh), have (you). have.) INFINITIVE MOOD (INFINITIF). Present. Past. avoir {à-voàr) ^ avoir eu {à^oâr ù "j to iX 3.\oir {dâ-voàr) Wo have. d'avoir eu (), had. ayant eu {ay-yâng-iu)^ hav- ing had. Idiom atîcal expressions with ayoir. There are a number of idiomatical expressions in connection with avoir^ which cannot be translated liter- ally and which the student should carefully commit to memory. I only mention the most important ones : J'ai froid {froâh), I am cold. J'ai froid aux mains {ô maing), my hands are cold. J'ai chaud {show), I am warm. J'ai mal à la tête, I have the head- ache. J'ai besoin de {bë zô-aing ^) I need. Il a cinq ans {saing kâng), he is ftve years old. J'ai peur {peûr\ I am afraid. J'ai faim {faing)^ I am hungry. J'ai so\i{swoâf), I am thirsty. Il a bonne mine, he looks well. Il a mauvaise mine, he is looking ill. J'ai envie de {âng-vêë), I desire I feel inclined to. J'ai sommeil [sômmë-yë \ I am sleepy. i) efi=:eain early. 2) bë-zô-aing has to be pronounced like two syllables onl)*. 3) Observe the vanishing liquid sound. 100 The pupil must make himself acquainted with the PERSONAL PRONOUNS. We distinguish between the: Personal Conjunctive Pronouns. Singular. isf Person. Nom. je {je) I^ Dai. me {më) to me Ace. me {^ne) me 2nd Person. Nom. tu {tu) thou Dat. te {të) to thee Ace. te {të) thee 3n/ Person. Masculine. Nom. il (/Mrr=kO-shay), to the Northern railway-station. — Drive quick {alUz vite)^ we have no time to lose {à perdre). — 4) Will you please pay the fare {la course=\'5i koûrs) now; it is forbidden (défendu) to stop {tie stationner) at the entrance gate (J Fen- tree) of the station. — 5) Have you any (des) luggage, sir ? — I have a trunk, a portmanteau, and a hatbox. — Will you have the three pieces (les trois eif/is=\ay troâh kôlee) checked, sir? — No, only {seu/emen/=seû\-mîing)y the trunk, please. — 6) Is this (est-ee ici) the waiting- room ? — Yes, sir, please take (veuillez prendre) your ticket and go into the waiting-room. — 7) One first class ticket to London (une première, Zûndres=un prém-yêhr, Long- dr). — 8) Have I any (du) overweight ? — Yes sir, you have five francs worth of overweight {=you have for five (cinç) francs of (de) overweight). — 9) Is that there (est-ce là) our train ? Yes, that is the express (or fast) train for Calais and London. i) This exercise contains a dialogue ot a traveller who is de- parting from Paris. 2) Take the perfeci=Havc you orJeicd ? COMPANION TO THE ^evîôed perôîon of the Pe-a/" ^côtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on the Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of tlie English Revision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BY A MEMBER OF THE AMERICAN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revision of the Work and Co-operation of the New Testament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons which influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Committee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, Fays of this book: " Many persons have expressed a desire that, simultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons lor such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire Nowhere else in print can be found a statement so lull and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an imexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor o# the Church of the Strangers. New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers wou!d have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover all the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lost. ....All this IS set forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligent interest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this little book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every men.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-classes." "So valuable, interesting and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — hiew York Observer. Paper, 8vo size, 35 cents ; Cloth., 16mo, 75 cents. ^*^ For Sale by Boolisellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK iL CO., Publishers, 10 & 12 Dey St., N. Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full. Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come lo consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent with accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, wiih numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will rese-nble the Bagster Bible, *' Facsimile large edition," known as '«the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices ivithin the reach of all. Thii "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, it eluding the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes c f the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de ii the •* Bagster Bibles,'' with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be printed in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King James version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in RESPON'SIVE reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the mo.>t carefully prepared helps to the study of the revised New Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Popular Cloth Edition— Esaiy in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.90. Send for prospectus giving full description and prices of finer Bindings. I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, 10 and 12 Dey St., Now York. THE i\%\tx%t\^\i ^gstettj. A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY ^utttt 4^(tt(att* ^^m% mi Ktalian. BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Late Director of the '''' Akadetnie fiir fretnde Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the '"'' Meisterschaft College^'' in London^ and Principal of the *■'' Meisterschaft School of Practical Linguistry^'' in New York. FRENCH. IN FIFTEEN PARTS. EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. PART III. NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System/' for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened âlie ||eister^ckft ^cljool of Practical fingtii^trg FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the ans\yer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price, Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercises and questions must be written on a separate sheet of paper, .and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter .addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, JO a«rf Vi Jï«v Strrrt. .Vr«r York. %l\i: ^mi^ui{\é\=^p\p\t, FRENCH. PART III. m. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Do not forget to call me at a quarter to five to-morrow morning, or even earlier, if yon can; and tell the waiter, if you please, to bring me, at five o'clock precisely, a cup of coffee with milk, some slices of bread and butter, and some soft- boiled eggs. Do not forget to call me at a quarter to five to-morrow morning, or even earlier, if yon ran. III. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. N'oubliez pas de me réveiller demain matin à noû-blëë-ay pâh de më ray-vë-yëh de-maing mâ-taing âh cînq^heures moins^un quart, ou plus tôt si tous saing keûr mo-aing zeïing kâhr, ou plii lô sëë voQ pouvez ; et dites au garçon, s'il vous plaît, de poû vëh ; ay dëët Oh gâr-song, pêë vou play, de m'apporter à çinq^lieures précises une tasse de mà-por tëh âh saing keûr pray-sëëze un lâss de café au lait, des tartines de beurre et des^oeufs à kâh-fay oh lay, day lâr-iCGn de beûrr ay day zeû âh la coque. là cock 1. N'oubliez pas de me réveiller demain matin à noû-blëë-ay pâh dé më ray-vë-yëh dë-maing mà-taing âh cinq""hcures moins""un quart, ou plus tôt si vous saing keûr mo-aing zeûng kâhr, où plu lô sëë voû pouvez. poû-vCh. 110 Do not forget [to forget, ouUier. Compare the table of ' dmncr,' page 59-] to [de before the infinitive means /f] me to wake to-morrow morning at five hour at five o'clock less a quarter at a quarter to five [Literally : at five less a quarter.] or \o%i means ' where,' and ou ' or '] more soon sooner, earlier if you can [Irregular verb. It means • I am able * <^r I can' ; I cannot, 'je ne puis,' ], My watch does not agree (s'accorde) with your dock. 25. Why can he not come earlier ? I) I beg that the student will go iii the same maunci uiiouku 117 11. Il est deux'^heures moins vingt-cinq {ccl ay dcû zcûr mo-aing vaing saiftg). 12. Il est deux'^heures moins vingt. 13. Il est deux^heures moins'^^un quart {or moins le ^ quart). 14. Il est deux'^heures moins dix. 15. Il est deux^heures moins cinq. 16. Il est deux'^heures précises.^ 17. Voulez-vous^avoir la bonté {bong-tay) de me dire, monsieur, quelle^heure il est {kèl-leûr-ëël-ay) ? iS. ( Ma montre retarde de dix minutes, ( or Je retarde de dix minutes. 19. Vous^avancez (voû zâh-vâng-say) de cinq minutes, monsieur. Au- contraire {dh cong-trayr) je retarde de trois. 20. Allez vite cocher (àh-lêh vëêt cô'shêh)\ nous n'avons pas de temps à perdre. Le train part à midi et demie (lé traing par tâh mcê-dcé ay dë-mëë). 21. Dites au tailleur, s'il vous plaît, de m'envoyer mon pantalon noir vers sept^heures moins^un quart au plus tard {dëëf tôh tà-ycûr,sëë voû play ^ de mdng-voàh' yëh mong pâng-tâh-loug n'woàhr vayr set teûr mo-aing zeûng kâr ôh plu târ.) 22. L'horloge (lôr-ldhje) sonne â présent [àh pray-zàng). 23. L'horloge a sonné deux'^heures, mais je crois qu'elle retarde de beaucoup {Jzëll rè-tàr dé bdh-coit). 24. Ma montre ne s'accorde pas avec la pendule (pâng-diil). 25. Pourquoi ne peut-il venir plus tôt ? the different hours, so that he may become thoroughly familiar with the French way of expressing the time of day. lis 26. I cannot tell you, madam. 27. Can't you make it at once? '. Waiter, can we have a private room {/(/icaOt/iti [xu- tlculier) ? And tell the waiter, if yon please, to bring nic, at five o'clock exactly, a cup of coffee with milk, some slices of bread and bntter, and some soft-boiled eggs, And tell [Irregular impcralive of the verb dire, lo savj to the waiter if you please; please; pray. pleases [Irregular present of the verb, plaire, to please] to bring me a cup of coffee some slices of bread {/((r/t'„ty) and h>m.T and 119 26. Je ne puis vous le dire, madame. 27. Ne pouvez-vous le faire tout de suite {tout s'wcct) ? 28. Garçon, pouvons-nous^avoir un cabinet particu- lier \càh-béé-néh pâr-tcê-kil-lycJi) ? Et dites au garçon, s'il vous plaît, de iti'appor- ay dëët tOh gàr-song sëë voû play de mà-por-^ ter à einq^lieures précises une tasse de café au tëh âh saing keûr pray-sëëze un tâss de kàh-fay Oh lait, des tartines de beurre et des oeufs à la coque. lay day lâhr tëëii de beûrr ay day zeû âli lâ cock. Et dites {dcct) [Irregular imperative of dire {dêîr), to say] au garçon s'il vous plaît {or je vous prie [ =prëë'\) plaît {plciy) [The present is conjugated thus : Je plais, tu plait, il plaît, nous plaisons, vous plaisez, ils T^XdasGVii—playze.l de m 'apporter {de inàp-por-têJi) une tasse de café {un tass de kàh-fay^ des tartines de beurre {day tàhr-têcn de beilrr) et des oeufs {day zeû) 120 shell ; egg-shell soft-boiled eggs. 1. Can you give us lodging for to-night? {Literally: Can you lodge us \iiou8 loger] for this night [cette 7iuU]?) 2. Do you want a double bed (=a bed for two persons), gentlemen ? 3. No, we should like (notis désirerions) to have a foom with two beds. 4. This room does not please me ; or, I do not like this room. 5. Show me another room in the second siory (an se- cond), please. 6. What is the price of this room per day (= of wltich price [de q^iel prix] is this room a [par] day)? 7. Five francs. 8. Attendance (h service) included ? 9. No, sir, attendance is charged («ejyfl^c) extra (à /wir/). 10. How much (combien) a day? 11. One franc daily. 12. All right (c'est hien)\ I will take (f arrête) the room. 13. Have my luggage brought up (monter) and pay tlic cab, please ; I liave no change (monnaie) with mc (sur moi). 14. I have paid for it already (déjà) ; it was four francs. 15. What!? That cannot be! or, That is impossible! 16. Waiter, bring me in the first place (avant tout) a little warm water. I want to wash myself (me Uiver). 121 la coque {là cock) des^oeufs à la coque (day zeû âh là cock). 1. Pouvez-vous nous loger {lôh-jay) pour cette nuit {nwêé) ? 2. Voulez-vous un lit (zeûng Icë) pour deux personnes, messieurs ? 3. Non, nous désirerions avoir une chambre à deux lits {rioû day-zëë-rê-ryong zâ-vwoâr un s/iàftg-br àh deû lêê). 4. Cette chambre ne me plaît pas. 5. Montrez-moi une autre chambre au second, s'il vous ^Xiûi {d/i sê-f.ong sëé voû play). 6. De quel prix (prëë) cette chambre est-elle par jour ? 7. C'est de cinq francs {say de saing frâng). 8. Le service compris {le sër-vëës cmig-prëë) ? 9. Non, monsieur, le service se paye {pay) à part (iz// par). 10. Combien {kong-byaing) par jour? 11. C'esf^un franc par jour {say teûng f rang par jour). 12. C'est bien {byaing) ; j'arrête la chambre. 13. Faites monter mes^efïets et veuillez payer {pay- yëh) le cocher; je n'ai pas de monnaie {mo-nay) sur moi. 14. Je l'ai déjà {day-jàh) payé; c'était quatre francs. 15. Comment!? Cela ne se peut pas {coin-viàng ! së-ld ne se peu pàh) ! 16. Garçon, apportez-moi avant tout {âh-vâng toil) un peu d'eau chaude {eilng peu dôh shdhd) ; je veux me laver {lâh-vëh). . 122 17- Bring me some ^ fresh [fraîche) water, some soap [du savon) and towels (des serviettes). Above all things {avant tout) I want to wash. iS. The chambermaid shall bring you (vous apportera) everything (tout ça) in an instant. 19. Take care {a?/ez soin) to give me clean (Manes) sheets (draps), and be sure they are well aired (=iand very dry [sec.vj). io. Any other orders, sir? (Literally: Have you yet something else (autre chose) to command (à coni- mander) ? 21. Yes ; please give us two mattresses (matelas) ; we do not like feather-beds (lits de jihimc). 22. You shall have everything, gentlemen. 23. And do not forget to tell the boy to wakç us early to-morrow. 24. Have you brought us some fresli water ? J-. As (aussi) fresh as (que) one can have it in Paris where the water is not drinkable. (Literally: Where the wells \imits'\ do not give drinkaldc T ))i>i,tlh''^ water.) 26. Are my boots blacked {ciries)^ 27. Yes, sir; please give me your clothes ; I am going (je vais) to brush them. 28. Don't forget to call me at half past six. i) The French have a peculiar form of the artiih\ not found in English. This is the so-called partitive article, in which du. de la and des are emplo3'ed before nouns used in ^.fartitiir SiHSt- : thai is lo sa}', when only a pail oitJu iJiin:^ o)- pi'isrii spoken of is referred to This explanation of the />iir/tfiXY \ir/ùit is stricily graminatual, hut hardly lucid. The pupil will therefore. observe thai expressions in which we employ the words jv-v.v or ii/n' are rendered in French L\ 123 17- Apportez-moi de ^ l'eau fraîche {fraysh)^ du savon {sâh-vong) et des serviettes (sér-vyët)\ avant tout je veux me laver. i8. La fille vous^apportera tout ça {toû sàh) dans^un instant (dàng zeûng aing-stàng). 19. Ayez soing (so-atng) de me donner des draps blancs {drâh blank) et bien secs {seek). 20. Avez-vous^encore autre chose (ôht shmus) à com- mander {co7n-mâng-day) ? 21. Oui, veuillez nous donner deux matelas {inà-të-ldh) ; nous n'aimons pas les lits de plume {plum). 22. Vous^aurez tout cela, messieurs. 23. Et n'oubliez pas de dire au comissionaire de venir nous réveiller demain de bonne^heure. 24. Nous'^avez-vous déjà apporté de l'eau fraîche? 25. Aussi {ôh~sée) fraîche qu'on peut l'avoir à Paris où les puits {pic-èë) ne donnent pas {né donpàh) de l'eau potable {de lô pô-tâh-bl). 26. Mes bottes sont-elles cirées {sêë-ray) ? 27. Oui, monsieur; donnez-moi vos'^'habits, s'il vous plaît ; je vais {vay) les brosser. 28. N'oubliez pas de me réveiller à six^heures et demie. du (for the masc. sing.) ; by de la (for the fern, sing.) and by des (for the plural of both genders). Give me some bread Donnez-moi du pain Bring me some eggs, Apportez-moi des oeufs He is drinking beer (^rsome beer), II boit de la bière. Have you any towels ? Avez-vous des serviettes? Has he written any letters ? A-t-il écrit des lettres ? 124 GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. Learn the following tenses first, leaving the others for after-study : Present^ Imperfect^ Perfect^ Pluperfect^ Future^ and Conditional. AUXILIARY VERBS. II. Etre {^^ytr), to be. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. Je suis (Je s'io-êê), I am. tu es (/// ay), thou art. il est (êêl <7i'), he is. nous sommes (noil son/), we are. vpus^etes (roû ZiJyt), you are. ils sont (êêl song)y they are. Imperfect. J'étais (jai-tay), I was tu étais (/// (ly-tay), thou wast, il était (ëêl ay-tay)^ he was. nous^etions (noil zay-tyong), we were. vous^étiez i^voil zay-fyè/i), you were. ils^étaient (êêl zay-tu}), they were. Preterite. ■ Je fus (jefii), I was. tu fus (tiifii), thou wast. il fut (eel fn), he was. 125 nous fûmes {noiifim), we were, vous fûtes (voiï fut), you were, ils furent (cêl fiir), they were. Future. Je serai {je sê-rêJî), I shall or will be. tu seras {til së-râ\ thou wilt be. il sera [êêl se-rd), he will be. nous serons [noû sé-rong), we shall or will be. vous serez (voil sè-rèli), you will be. ils seront {ccl sé-rong), they will be. 1st Conditional. Je serais i^jësë-ray), I should be. tu serais (/// se-ray), thou w'ouldst be. il serait {ëêl së-ray), he would be. nous serions {noù së-ryong), we should be. vous seriez (710Û së-fjch), you would be. ils seraient {ëcl së-ray), they would be. COMPOUND TENSES. été {ay-tay), been. Perfect. J'ai été {Jay ay-tay), I have been, tu as^éié, thou hast been, il a été, he has been, nous^avons^été, we have been, vous'^avez^été, you have been, ils^ont^été, they have been. 12G Pluperfect. J 'avai s'hèle {jà-vay-zay-tay\ I had been, tu avais'^été, thou hadst been. iPavait^été, he had been, nous^avions'^été, we had been, vous^'aviez^été, you had been, ils'^avaient^été, they had been. 2nd Pluperfect. J'eus'^été {jii zay-tay), I had been, tu eus'~"été, &c. iPeut^été, &c. nous'^eûmes^été, we had been. vous^eûtes^été, &c. ils^eurent^été, &c. 2 fid Future. J'aurai été {jd-ray-ay-tay), I shall or will have been. tu auras^été, &c. iPaura été, &c. nous^aurons^été, we shall or will have been. vous"'aurez'"été, &c. ils^auront'^'été, &c. 2nd Conditional. J'aurais^été {jô-ray-zay-tay)^ I should have been, tu aurais'^été, &c. iPaurait^été, &c. nous'^aurions^ete, we should have been, vous^auriez'^été, &c. ils^auraienPe'té, ' &c. 127 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Que je sois {kê je swoàh), that I may be. que tu sois (ké til s'woàh), &c. qu'il soit {kéêl swoàh)^ &c. que nous soyons {Jie noû shuod-yong)^ &c. que vous st)yez (kè voû s'wod-yêh)^ &c. qu'ils soient {këêl s'woâh), &c. Imperfect. Que je fusse {kê je fiiss), that I might be. que tu fusses {kë til filss), &c. qu'il fût {ke-êl fil), &c. que nous fussions {fUs-yong), &c. que vous fussiez {fils-yëh)^ &c. qu'ils fussent (/ilss)^. &c. Perfect. Que j'aie été (kë jay ciy-tay), that I may have been, que tu aies'^été, &c. qu'il'^ait'^éfé, &c. que nous^ayons""été, &c. que vous^ayez^été, &c. qu'ils^aienf^été, &c. Pluperfect. Que j'eusse été {kc jiis ay-tay), that I might have been, que tu eusses^été, • &c. qu'il eût^été, - &c. que nous^eussions'^été, &c. que vous^eussiez^été, &c. qu'ils^eussent'^été (/Cw/ zils tay-tay), &c. 1^8 IMPERATIVE MOOD. sois {swoâh) be. qu'il soit let him be soyons (s'wodh-yong) let us be. soyez (s'woâ/i-yr/i) be (you). INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. Past. être {ay-t/') ^ avoir été {à-vôdr-ay-tay ^ to d'etre(^^?y-/r) [.to be. d'avoir été {dâ-voâr-ay-iay piave à être j à avoir été J been. PARTICIPLES. Present. Past. étant (.?y-/.?//^') being. été (.z>'-/./>') been, [fern, unchanged.] ayant été '[(ty-yâ/ii; tay-t.iy) having been. Words Hôtel l^^h-telî). le maître de l'hôtel {may-tr), le concierge {kong-sycrsh)^ le garçon {gar-song)^ le commissionnaire, la bonne, \ la fille (de chambre), j la salle à manger (mâng-jciy), la salle des voyageurs (rv?J- yà-jeûr), la chambre {shâng-br), la chambre donnant sur la rue {silK là ru), Hotel. the landlord. the porter (night-porter). the waiter. the boots, the commissioner the housemaid. tlie dining-room, the coflfec-room, the break- fast-room ; the parlor. the room, the frunt-room. 12< the ordinary, table d'hôte, the bill. la chambre donnant sur la the back-room. cour [cour), la table cC hoi^ {tàkbl dote) y la note, ) l'addition (àd-dëé-syong), \ au premier {prc-inyéh)^ au second {se-gong), au troisième {troâh-zyêhni)^ le vestibule {^vè-stêé-biil)^ l'escalier {les-kàh-lyéh)^ la marche {j/u:rsh)^ on the first floor. on the second floor, on the third floor. thehalL - ' the staircase, the step. Translate the following Exercise into English, and then again, without assistance of the book, into French. Le Dîner. Bon jour, cher ami. Vous voilà [bc/io.'d, the?î), re- venu [returned) de voyage } Depuis (since) quand êtes- vous à Paris .'' Depuis hier soir. Ma première visite est pour vous. C'est bien aimable (amiable) de votre part (on your part^^^of you, iu you, etc.). J'espère que vous me ferez (future of faire ) l'amitié {friendship, favor) de dîner avec moi. Comment trouvez-vous ce potage (soiip)l Excellent; je vois (/ see) que votre cuisinier(^^<7/C', kwëë-zëë-nyëh), est un homme dje goût. Permettez-moi (permit, allow me) de vous verser (pour out) un verre de Madère (Madeira). Un petit verre de madère après la soupe (soup) ne fait 130 jamais {7jever) de mal {does never any harm). Bien, au con- traire. — Puis-je vous offrir {offer) une tranche de boeuf {àeef), ou préférez-vous un biftek {beefsteak^ often called chateaubriand)? J'aime bien le biftek cuit i\ point (n'cll donCy kwee ah pô-aing). Veuillez donc vous servir {to help yourself). Voici des pommes de terre {potatoes), des épinards {spinach) et des choux-fleurs {caulijiotoer). Aimez-vous les épinards ? Non, monsieur, pas du tout {not at ail). Dans ce cas {then, in that ease) prenez {take) des choux-fleurs ou un autre légume {regetalde^. Quel magnifique (mân-yëë-fëëk = magnificent) saumon '{sal- vion) on apporte là {there). C'est vraiment {really) une belle pièce (pêëayse). Voici {there is) de la sauce aux câpres. Je l'aime mieux (mee^û, better) à Thuile et au vinaigre. N'oubliez pas que les poissons (_/?j^) deman- dent à nager {sivim). Ne craignez rien (né krén-yéh rëë-aing, don't be afraid, ?iever fear .')\ votre vieux bor- deaux {claret) se recommande tout seul {alo/ie). Jean {fûhn), passez-moi le sel et le poivre, l'huile et le COMPANION TO THE Jevîôed pefôîoû of the Peia/* ^eôtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on the Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Revision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BY À MEXBEB OP THE AMERICAN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revision of the Work and Co-operation of the New Testament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Différence, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised Nevsr Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons which influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement "with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Committee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, says of this book: •' Many persons have expressed a desire that, simultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons for such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire.... Nowhere else in print can be found a statement so lull and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D.. Pastor of the Church of the Strangers. New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers would have a wearisome work in seekuig to dis- cover all the changes made, and tp ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lost. ....AH this is set forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligentinterest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this little book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every men.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to iiatroduce it as a text-book in our Bible-clasbes." "So valuable, interesting and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — iVczy York Observer. Faper, 8vo size, S5 cents ; Cloth, 16ino, 75 cents. ^** For Sale by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, fO& 12 Dey St., N. Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full, Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come to consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent wiih accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will rese-nble the Bagster Bible, " Facsimile large edition," known as '«the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices ivithin the reach of all. Thiî "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, itcluding the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to wliich reference is m de in the ** Bagster Bibles,'' with numerou? others, so far as appropriate, will be printed in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King James version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully prepared HELPS TO THE STUDY OF the revised New Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Popiilar Clotli Edition— Ready in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.90. Send for prospectus giving full dcscriptioJi and prices of finer Bindings. I.K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, (Oand 12 Dey St.. New York. THE a mkntitiift $ptem» A SIMPLE ANU PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE_TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY ftmli iu^m^ ^patti$i and Mm BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Late Director of the ^^ Akademie fur fremde Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the '"' Meisterschaft College^'' in London, and Principal of ike "•^ Meisterschaft School of Practical Linguistry'''' in New York. FRENCH IN FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. PART IV. NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo ANU 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened âlic J[dslcr^'dmft |>cI|ool of ïïrnctical l^inguijlrn FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons ot each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on an)' difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the menr.ber. to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price, Five Dollars, pays fiir one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercises and questions must be written on a sepaiate î^heet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, 10 ami I'i Dey Street, Xen- York. ^Ije ^ebt^f!S^lialV^g$ti}in, FREISTCH. PART I V IV. ( Continuation. ) 7f). You may depend (com'pter) on it (?/). ÎO. Good morning, sir; how did you pass the first night {la 2)rcmière nuit) in our house? I . Was the bed quite to your taste ? {Literally : Was the bed arranged \(trrange\ according to [^/V/prtw] your habits \yoè liahitudes] ? ) ■^2. Not quite {pas toiit d fait), madam; I should like to have another pillow {tin oreiller de plus) ^y j3. Please put on {mettez) another blanket ''"^" //,»/>•,»•_ tîfre (le plus). 34. Pray, give me a bolster {trai'ersin);.^l> cannot sleep {dormir)y when my head lies so low (=: when I have tlic head too [/ro/?] low [ir/.v.<«<']). 35 This evening you will find everj'thing a^ianged to your liking (gout). 36. To-morrow morning, precise!)' at eight o'clock, you will bring me some coffee with milk and some rolls. 37. Do you keep {tc7iez-rous) a.n ordinîiry {table d'hôte)} 38. At what o'clock is the table d'hote ? IV. {Continuation,) 29. Vous pouvez^y {zee) compter {cong-têh). 30. Bonjour {bong-Joûr), monsieur ; comment'^avez-vous passé la première nuit {prëin-yëhr nwèë) dans notre maison ? 31. Le lit était-il arrangé {àr-ràng-jay) d'après vos^habi- tudes {ddh-pray vo zâJi-bee-iUd ) ? 32. Pas touf^à fait {toû-tâh-fay) madame ; je voudrais'^a- oir un^oreiller de plus {eûn noh-rè-yeh de plil). 33. Mettez-moi {vië^tay-7n' woàh), je vous prie, une couver- ture de plus (//// coû-vèr-tiir de pli't). 34. Donnez-moi, s'il vous plaît, un traversin {tràver- saing) ; je ne puis dormir {dor~?ncër), quand j'ai la tête trop basse {trôh bâss). 35. Ce soir {se s'woàr) vous trouverez tout cela arrangé à votre goût {goû). 36. Demain matin à huit^'heures précises vous m'appor- terez du café au lait et des petits-pains {day p'tcê paing). 37. Tenez-vous table d'hôte {tâbl dot) ? 38. A quelle heure dîne-t-on à la table d'hôte {dêên-tong àh là tâbl dot) ? jy. You can have lunch (déjeuner à la fourchette) in the breakfast room [la salle des voyageurs). >. Would you be kind enough to register (or enter) your name and profession {profes.sio)t) in the traveller's book ? .; ;. Did you leave the key (clef) in your d^.v.i, y.,, have you got it with (sur) you? 42. Will you please give it to me, so that the house- maid may (^j?«/.s*^e) clean {faire) your room ? 43. Waiter, did you order a cab ? 44. Have you brought all my luggage downstairs (brought downstairs = descendu)} ,3. Is this the waiting-room? , J. Yes, sir; please take your ticket at the olhce and go into the waiting-room. 47. Is that our train ? 48. Yes,- that is the express-train for London. 49. I beg your pardon, sir; which is the way to St. Ho- nore Street ? {Literally: Street St. Honoré, if you please?) 50. I beg your pardon, sir; which is the way to the opera- house ? 51. Go straight ahead {tout droit). 52. Pass (over) the bridge {le pont) and then {puis) go right ahead. 53 What do you want to buy ? 54. Different things {différentes choses) ; linen {de la toile) in the first place (d'abord), to make some chemises; and then (puis) neckties, handkerchiefs, and stock- ings. 55. Does Mr. N. live (.v dwell = demcvrc-t-il) in this house ? 135 39. Dans la salle des voyageurs vous pouvez déjeuner à la fourchette [foûr-shèt). 40. Auriez-vous la bonté {pr-yëh voû là bong-tay) d'écrire votre nom et votre profession {proh-fës-yong) sur le livre des voyageurs {vo-àh-yà-jeûr) ? 41. Avez-vous laissé la clef {klay^ de la chambre à votre porte, ou l'avez-vous sur vous? 42. Veuillez me la donner pour que la bonne puisse (pii-ïs) faire votre chambre ? 43. Garçon, avez-vous fait (fay) venir un fiacre (fêê-â-k'r)? 44. Avez-vou5 descendu {dé-sàng-dit) tous mes'^elîets {inay-zay-fay') ? 45. Est-ce ici {ay-sêë-sëe) la salle d'attente ? 46. Oui, monsieur; veuillez prendre votre billet au guichet, et passez à la salle d'attente. 47. Est-ce Jà {there) notre train ? 48. Oui, monsieur, c'est l'express {lex-pray) pour Londres. 49. V^ixdiQYs. (par- dong)^ monsieur; la rue St. Honoré, s'il vous plaît {rii saing-fo-no-ray, scê voû play) ? 50. Pardon, monsieur ; l'opéra, s'il vous plaît ? 51. Allez tout droit [toû di-oâJi). 52. Passez le pont et puis {pû-ec) allez tout droit. 53. Que voulez-vous acheter ? 54. Différentes choses {dif-fay-ràngt shows) ; de la toile {twoàhl) d'abord {dà-bôr) pour me faire des chemises, et puis (pii-êê) des cravates, des mouchoirs {inoil- shwoâr) et des bas {bàh). 55. Monsieur N. demeure-t-il {dc-meûr-tcêl) dans cette maison ? 136 56. Is Mr. N. at home, porter? 57. Does Mr. B. live here? {^Literally : Is it here at Mr. B.'s?) 58. Is Mr. N. at home {i.e. for callers)? {Literally: Is Mr. N. visible?) 59. Yes, sir, walk in {entrez)^ pray. 60. Have I the honor of speaking to Mr. D. ? 61. I have the honor of addressing Mr. D. (I think) ? 62. That's my name. (These last eiglu phrases are idiomatic expressions, and can be given only so.) IV. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Always make your purchases in Paris in the large stores, where everything is sold yery cheap and at fixed prices. For instance, here is a ball- dress which I hare just bought for less than fifty francs. 137 56. Monsieur N. est-il chez lui, concierge? 57. Est-ce ici (ays-sëé-sëë) chez Monsieur B. {bay)} 58. Monsieur N. est-il visible {véé-zéëbl) ? 59. Oui monsieur; entrez {à?tg-tray) s'il vous plaît (i-/^ voie play). 60. Est-ce à {ays a) monsieur D. {day) que j'ai l'honneur (lôn-neûr) de parler ? 61. C'est à monsieur D. que j'ai l'honneur de parler? 62. (C'est) moi-même {say mwoàh-jnaim). IV. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. À Paris faîtes Tos^emplettes toujours dans les âh pâ-rêê fate voh zâng-plët toîi-joîir dâng lay grands magasins^ où tout se vend très-bon marché grang mâ-gâ-zaing oQ toû se vâng tray bong mâr-shay et à prix fixe. Par exemple, voici une robe de bal 3}^ âh prëS fix. pârr ëg-zâng-pl voâh-sëë iin robe de bâhl que je viens d'acheter pour moins de cinquante kë je vyaing dâsh-tëh pour mo -aing de saing -kâng francs. frâng 138 1. Always do your shopping in Paris in the large stores, where everything is sold very cheap and at fixed prices. At ; in ; to ; [Distinguish between à {with accent) at, in, and a {jitiithoiit accent) has,\ Paris «lake; do* your ^ purchases always in the 1) Faire, to make, to do, is an irregular verb, of which the pupil may now learn the following tenses : Present, Imperfect. • Future. Je fais {fay). Je faisais. Te ferai, tu fais {fay). tu faisais. m feras, il fait (fay\ il faisait. il fera. nous izx%ows,{fay~zong). nous faisions. nous ferons. vous faites {fate). vous faisiez. vous ferez. ils font (/^;;^). 'Is faisaient. ils feront. Perfect. Pluperfect. Imperative. J'ai fait. T'avais fait. Fais, tu as fait. tu avais fait. faisons. *^- &c. faites. 2) The so-called possessive pronouns or possessive ar//r'«f must always agree in number and gender with the noun it relates to; i.e., f^rand, when it refers to a masculine noun ; 141 grands ' {grâng) magasins {mà-gâ-zatng) où {ou) [Distinguish between où, where, and ou {without accent), or.] tout {ton) se {se) vend (vàfjg) ' très {/ray) bon ipong) marché {màr-shay) très-bon marché et {ay) à {àh) prix {prée) fixe {fix) 1. Que voulez-vous faire ce matin ? 2. Je voudrais faire mes'^emplettes* voulez-vous m'ac- compagner {mà-cong-pân-yéK) ? 3. Pourquoi voulez-vous faire vos^emplettes dans cette boutique {boû-tcêk) ? 4. Achetez toujours dans^les grands magasins, où tout se vend à prix fixe. grande, when referring to féminines ; grands, when referring to several masculines, and grandes, when relating to several féminines. 2) See the conjugation oi vendre, Grammatical Remarks in No. VI. 142 ^5- I should like to buy some cloth {du drap) to make a coat of (= of which [de quoi] to make a coat). 6. What sort {quelle sorte) of cloth do you wish, sir ? 7. Have you got any samples {or patterns) ? 8. Yes, sir ; here are {voici) samples {or patterns) of all the pieces of cloth {de tons les draps) which we have in stock {da7is le magasin). g. What {quel) is the price of this one {celui-ci) ? 10. That costs {il est de) eighteen {dix-huit) francs a meter {le mètre). 11. That {ça) seems {semble) very dear {cJier) to me. 12. That seems rather (= a little, U7i peu) dear. 13. I beg your pardon, sir, this {cc) is not dear for the quality {la qualité) ; on the contrary («z^ contraire), it is very clieap. 14. How much does this cost ? \$. That costs ten {dix) francs. 16. What {quel) is the price of this (= of tliis object [de cet^objet]) ? 17. What is the price of these gloves {ces f/ants) ? iS. What is the price of this silk dress {cette robe de soie)? 19. How {combien) do you sell this {cela) ? 20. How {or at wliat price, combien) do you sell Ihis silk ? 21. How much do you charge for this? {Literally : How much this object ?) i) We have the following pronouns for our this, viz., ce (masc.> ; cette (fem.); ces (plural, both genders), as : .v train (,c.- /r,:;>;-) ;hi:< train; cette couverture, this cover; ccs^enfanis k- these children 143 5- Je voudrais^acheter du drap (drâJi) de quoi faire un'^habit. 6. Quelle sorte de drap désirez-vous, monsieur? 7. Avez-vous des'^échantillons (day zay-shà7ig-têê-yong) ? 8. Oui, monsieur ; voici {voàh-sêe) des'^échantillons de tous les draps que nous^avons dans le magasin. 9. Quel est le prix de celui-ci {kêll ay le préé de cè-liCêé- séé) ? 10. Il est de dix-huit francs le mètre [ëël lay de dcë zwéét frdJig le maytr). 11. Ça me semble très-cher (sa me sàngbl fray shayr). 12. Ça me semble un peu cher (eûng peu shayr). 13. Pardon, monsieur; pour la qualité {Ââ-lêê-lay), ce n'est pas cher, au contraire {cong-trayr), c'est très-bon mar- ché. j Combien cela coûte-t-il (Jzong-byaing së-lah coùt-têêl) ? l Combien ça (sâ/i) coûte-t-il ? ^ Cela coûte dix {dêê) francs. ■^' ( C'est de dix francs. 16. Quel est le prix de cet ^'^ohjet (këll lay le prëë de sét tob-jëh) ? 17. Quel est le prix de ces ^ gants ? 1 8. Quel est le prix de cette ^ robe de soie (robe de s'woâh) ? 19. Combien vendez-vous cela (kong-byaing vâng-dëh voû së-làh)} 20. Combien vendez- vous cette soie? 21. Combien cet objet (kong-byaing sët tob-Jëh)} Remark : Instead of r^, this, we must write cet before masculine nouns beginning with a voivel or a silent h, as ; rj^^enfant (sè-làng- 'fàng), this child ; cet'^homme {se torn), this 144 GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. Of the Negative and Interrogatiye forms of the Auxiliaries. Whereas in English the negation is simply expressed by the particle not^ the French use tivo negative words, viz. ne and pas, the first of which is placed before the simple verb, the other after it, as: Je ne suis pas, I am not. — In compound tenses, the participle foiloius J>as, as: Je n'ai pas eu^ I have not had. In interrogations, the pronoun which is the subject of the verb is placed after it, and they are joined by a hyphen, as : as-fu ? avez-vous ? — When the third person singular ends with a vowel, -/- is placed between the verb and //, elk or on : a-t-il? a-t-eile? a-t-on ? aura-t-on ? The proper use of the French negation being some- what difficult, the pupil will do well to study thorough- ly the I. Negative Form of the Auxiliaries. INDICATIVE MOOD. Avoir, to have. Être, to be. Present Tense. Je n'ai pas, I have not. Je ne suis pas, I am not. tu n'as pas, thou hast not. tu n'es pas, thou art not. il n'a pas, he or it has not. il n'est pas, he or it is not. elle n'a pas, ^e^ has not. elle n'est pas, she is not. 145 nous n'avons pas, we have nous ne sommes pas, we are not. not. vous n'avez pas, you have not. vous n'êtes pas, you are not. ils n'ont pas, they have not. ils ne sont pas, they are not. Iniperfect. Je n'avais pas, I hàd not, &c. Je n'étais pas, I was not, &c. Preterite. Je n'eus pas, I had not, &c. Je ne fus pas, I was not, &c. Future. Je n'aurai pas, I shall not Je ne serai pas, I shall not have, &c. be, &c. \st Conditional. Je n'aurais pas, I should Je ne serais pas, I should not have, &c. not be, &c. COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. Je n'ai pas eu, I have not Je n'ai pas été, I have not had, &c. been, &c. Pluperfect. Je n'avais pas eu, I had not Je n'avais pas été, I had not had, &c. been, &c. 2nd Future. Je n'aurai pas^eu, I shall Je n'aurai pas^été, I shall not have had, &c. not have been, &c. 2.nd Co7iditional. Je n'aurais pas'^eu, I should Je n'aurais pas été, I should not have had, &c. not have been, &c. 146 SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Quejen'aiepas, that I(may) Que je ne sois pas, that I not have, &c. (may) not be, &c. Preterite. Que je n'eusse pas, that I Que je ne fusse pas, that I might not have, &c. were not, &c. Perfect. Que je n'aie pas'~'eu, that I Que je n'aie pas'^été, that I (may) not have had, &c. (i^'^ay) not have been, &c. Pluperfect. Que je n'eusse pas^eu, that Que je n'eusse pas^été, that I (might) not have had, I (might) not have been, &c. &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. N'aie pas, have not. Ne sois pas, be not, do not be. n'ayons pas, let us not have, ne soyons pas, let us not be. n'ayez pas, have not. ne soyez pas, be not. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. s, ) , N être pas, ) . \ not to have. ^ \ not to be. 'ir, ) ne pas être, \ N'avoir pas, ne pas avoir, ) ne pas Perfect. N'avoir pas eu, not to have N'avoir pa^eté, not to have had. been. 147 PARTICIPLES. Present. N'ayant pas, not having. N'étant pas, not being. Past. N'ayant pas'^eu, not having N'ayant pas'^été, not hav- had. ing been. II. Interrogative Form of the Two Auxiliaries. INDICATIVE MOOD. Prese7it, Ai-je, have I } Suis-je, am I .' as-tu, hast thou .? - es-tu, art thou ? a-t-il, has he .-* est-il, is he } a-t-elle, has she ? est-elle, is she .î' avons-nous, have we } sommes nous, are we .'' avez-vous, have you ? etes-vous, are you .'* ont-ils, ) , , sont-ils. \ ^ J- have they ? ^ ' v are they ? ont-elles, ) sont-elles, ' Imperfect. Avais-je, had I .-' &c. Etais-je, was I .'' &c. Preterite. Eus-je, had I.'' &c. Fus-je, was 1} &c. Future. Aurai-je, shall I have ? &c. Ser^i-je, shall I be ? &c. ist Conditional. Aurais-je, should I have.^ Serais-je, should I be? &c. &c. Perfect. Ai-je eu, have I had ? &c. Ai-je été, have I been ? &c. .148 Pluperfect. ' Avais-je eu, had I had ? &c. Avais-je été, had I been ? &c. 2nd Future. Aurai-je eu, shall I have Aurai-je été, shall I have had ? been ? 2nd Conditional. Aurais-je eu, should I have Aurais-je été, should I have had ? &c. been ? &:c. III. Negative and Interrogative Form. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present. N'ai-je pas, have I not ? Ne suis-je pas, am I not ? n'as-tu pas, hast thou not ? n'es-tu pas, art thou not ? n'a-t-il pas, has he not ? n'est-il pas, is he not ? n'avons-nous pas, have we ne sommes-nous pas, are we not ? not ? n'avez-vous pas, have you n'etes-vous pas, are you not? not? ne sont-ils pas, are they n'ont-ils pas, have they not ? not ? Imperfect. N 'avais-je pas, had I not ? &c. N 'étais- je pas,was I not ? &c. Preterite. N'eus-je pas, had I not ? &c. Ne fus-je pas, was I not ? &c. \st Future. N 'aurai-je pas, shall I not Ne serai-je pas, shall I not have ? &c. be ? &c. \st Conditional. N'aurais-je pas, should I not Ne serais-je pas, should I have ? &c, not be ? &c. 149 COMPOUND TENSES. Perfect. N'ai-je pas^eu, have I not N'ai-je pas^été, have I not had ? &e. been ? &c. Pluperfect. N 'avais-je pas^eu, had I not N 'avais-je pas^été, had I not had ? &c. been ? &c. 2nd Future, N'aurai-je pas^eu, shall I N'aurai-je pas^été, shall I not have had ? &c. not have been ? &c. 2nd Conditional. N'aurais-je pas'^eu, should I N'aurais-je pas^été, should not have had ? &c. I not have been ? &c. 2. The pupil must make himself now familiar with the principal tenses of the FIRST CONJUGATION. Bonner, to give. INDICATIVE MOOD. Prese7it. Je donne {dôti)^ I give. nous donnons {don-nong)^ we give, tu donnes (don), thou givest. vous donner (don-nëh), you give, il donne {dôfi), he gives. ils donnent {dÔ7Ï), \ they elle donne, she gives. elles donne^i^ (^/c?//)> ' give. 150 Imperfect» Je donnais (^- they have given, elles^ont donné, ) Pluperfect {Compoufid of the Imperfect ). J'avais donné, I had given, &c. Covipotifid of the Preterite. J'eus donné, I had given, &c. 2nd Future {^Compound of the Future), J'aurai donné, I shall have given, &c. 2 fid Conditional. J'aurais donné, I should have given. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect. Que j'aie donné, that I (may) have given. Que tu aies donné, that thou (mayst) have given, &c. Pluperfect. Que j'eusse donné, that I (might) have given, &c. I, 153 PARTICIPLE. Ayant donné (fnas.), ) >• having given, ayant donnée (/em.), ) Remarks. 1 . Remember that there is but one way to render the expressions: /give, I do give^ and / am giving^ viz., je donne; I was giving or / used to give — je don- nais, &c. 2. Observe that / gave, I have given, &c., are^ mostly expressed by Tai donnée &c. The Preterite is only used in historical style, but hardly ever in con- versation. Of course these remarks refer not only to give but to all verbs. 3. In the interrogative and negative form, the auxiliary to do is never expressed. Ex. : Present. Interrogatively. Est-ce que je donne .-^ do I donnons-nous.? do we give.? give } donnez-vous .? do you give .? donnes-tu.? doest thou give .? donnent-ils {dÔ7t-têêl), do donne-^-il.? does he give.? they give .? donne-^elle? does she give.? donnent-elles? do they give ? Negatively. Je ne donne pas, I do not give, tu ne donnes pas, thou doest not give, il ne donne pas, he does not give, &c. Negative-Interrogative. Est-ce que je ne donne pas [ays kê je ne don pâJi) .? do I not give .? lr,4 ne donnes-tu pas? doest thou not give? ne (lonne-/-il pas? does lie not give? &c. Perfect. Ai-je donné? as-tu donné? a-/-il donné ? &:c. Have I given oi' did I give? &c. Je n'ai 2)as donné, tu n'as pas donné, &c. N'ai-jc pas donné ? n'as-tu pas donné? «^c. Conjugate in tlie same manner: parler, to speak; porter, to carry, to take; admirer, to admire; aimer, to love, &:c. N.B. — Je is apostroplicd before a vowel, as : J'aime, j'admire. Translate the following Letter into English and then render it again into French : Monsieur Gustave Fournier a Paris. ' Londres, le treize (13) Juin (June), iSSi. Monsieur, Nous avons l'honneur de vous remettre (re/nit) ci- inclus [inclosed) 5000 francs (cinq mille francs) sur (on) Paris, dont (wherewith) veuillez créditer (credit) notre compte* (account) et nous accuser réception' (and inform us of receipt thereof ). Nous avons l'honneur de vous saluer.* ( Yours very respectfully) R. & C. 1) This exercise is a sample of a simple French business-lclter. 2) Pronounce=/^rcI|ool of practical Jinguistrg FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared by the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire \o study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise and questions must be written on a sepaiate sheet of paper, ami must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Oflice Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO., to nnd t'i Dey Street. AVir Ymk. ^\{t ^m\^u(f[éi=^p\p\\, FRENOH PART r. {Continuation.) 22. That is very dear (cher). 23. That's awfully dear (horriblement cher). 24. Quite the contrary (au contraire), madam, that's very cheap. 25. Why! take this article (<7e^^oJye^c/) ; that is cheaper (meilleur marche). 26.' Tell me your lowest price, if you please {=^ tell me the last \le dernier^ price, if you please). 27. I do not like to bargain with people (— I do not like to bargain [à marchander^). 28. Please, tell me your lowest price, sir, I do not like to bargain with people. 29. We have only (ne-que) ' one price, madam. 30. I Jiave only one price, madam. 31. I cannot give it you at a lower price (= for less [à moins]) I assure you (je vous assure), madam. 33. I can give it you cheaper ( = less dear [mains cher]), but not in the same (même) quality (qualité). $^. Can't you give it to me any cheaper (}noi?is cher), sir ? 34. I can get it {procurer) cheaper somewhere else (ail- leurs). 35- ^ t>eg your pardon, madam, you are mistaken (t*ous i) Only is often expressed by ne-que. The construction is the same as nc-pas. V. {Continuation^ 22. C'est bien cher {say byaing shayr). 23. C'esf^horriblement cher {say tor-rëë-blë-mâng shayr). 24. Au contraire, madame, c'est très bon marché. 25. Prenez donc {pré-nëh do?ig) cet^objet-ci, c'est meil- leur marché {se tob-jëh sëë^ say 77ië-yeûr mar-shay). 26. Dites-moi le dernier prix, s'il vous plaît {or je vous prie = dêét nï'woâh le dër-nyéh prëë je voiïprëë). 27. Je n'aime pas à marchander {je naym pàh âh màr- shâng-dêh). 28. Dites-moi le dernier prix, s'il vous plaît, monsieur; je n'aime pas à marchander. 29. Nous 7i'avons qu''\xw'^ prix, madame {noi'i nd-vong keûng prcé mâ-dâm). 30. Je n'ai qu'un prix {je nay keûng prëë), madame. 31. Je ne puis {pu-ëë) vous le donner à moins {ino-aing) je vous^'assure {je voit zàs-sur\ madame. 32. Je peux vous le donner moins cher; mais cela ne sera pas la même {maym) qualité {kà-lëé-tay). 33. Ne pouvez-vous pas me le donner moins cher, mon- sieur ? 34. Je peux me le procurer {prô-cu-ray) ailleurs {àh-yeilr) à meilleur marché {âh më-yeùr màr-shay), 35. Pardon {pâr-dô7ig)y madame, vous vous trompez 158 VOUS trompez) ; you will surely (= at least [du moins]) get an inferior {inférieure) quality. 36. How can you ask me to let you have it {que je vous le laisse) at this price ? 37. I cannot sell with loss {à perte). {Pourtant means yet, however, nevertheless, and cannot be rendered into English in this phrase.) 38. I assure you, I give it you at cost-pilce {au prix coû- tant). 39. Tell me your lowest {h juste) price, please. 40. I assure you, sir, that is the \Qry lowest {c'est tout au juste, idiomatic French expression). 41. Is that your lowest price } \2. I cannot give it you any cheaper (à moins), I never ask too much (= overcharge [ /e ne surfais ja7nais]). That is a fixed price. 43 Did you sell your horse ? 44. For how much did you sell it .•* 45. This book sells {se vend) very well. ■''', I should like to have a bonnet of white satin {satin blanc) trimmed (garni) with lace {dentelles): 47. Try (essayez) this one, if you please, madam ; it is very becoming to you {il vous va or fait très-bien)^ I assure you. 48. Do you think so ? Well, to speak frankly (franche- ment), I am of the same (= of your) opinion (avi-f). 49. This hat is exceedingly (â merveille) becoming to you. 50. This dress does not fit you. 159 {trong-pay)\ du moins vous'^aurez une qualité in- férieure {du mo-atng' voû zô-rëh un kâ-lêê-tay aing-fay- ryeilr). 36. Comment pouvez-vous demander que je vous le laisse {layss) à ce prix ? 37. Je ne peux pourtant (tàng) pas vendre à perte {vàng- dr r à pert), 38. Je vous'^assure, je vous le donne au prix coûtant {je voit zà-sur je voû le don oh prêê coû-tâng). 39. Dites-moi le juste prix {lejùstprce)^ je vous prie. 40. Monsieur, je vous'^assure, que c'est tout^au juste {kë say tout tôhjust). 41. Est-ce là votre dernier prix {der-nyëh prëë) ? 42. Je ne puis vous le donner à moins. Je ne vous sur- fais {sur-fay) pas. C'esfun prix fixe i^say teilng prëë.jix). 43. Avez- vous vendu {vàng-du) votre cheval {shë-vàhl ) ? 44. Combien {or à quel prix) l'avez-vous vendu ? 45. Ce livre se vend très-bien. 46. Je voudrais'^avoir un chapeau de satin blanc (sà^ taing blâng) garni de dentelles {garnëë de dâng-tell). 47. Essayez-le {es-say-yëh le), s'il vous plaît, madame. Je vous'^assure, qu'il vous va {or fait) très-bien. 48. Vou^trouvez ? Eh bien ! Franchement {fràttg-s/ië- mâng) je suis de votre^avis {vot-râh-vëé). 49. Ce chapeau vous va à merveille {âh mer-vë-yë). 50. Cette robe ne vous fait pas. 160 2. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. For instance, here is a ball-dress which I have just bought for less than fifty francs. Through example; pattern; sample; insta.nce (parexempk mesius far instance). here is ; there is ; there are ; behold ^ a ball-dress " which ^ i) Voici, here is, and voilà, there is, are peculiariy constructed in connection with pronouns.. The French always say for instance : Here I am, me voihi, or vie voici. There he is, le voilà. Th^re they a -e, les voilà. Here we arc, notis voilà. Inhere ice ■■"■■• ■^''■-'-■■- -r .■•.• -.•-.■ arriv/s. 2) Whv must this construction be used' 3) We have only one relative pronoun for who, wliich and that, viz., qui, — Qui, however, is always the vomi fuj fire ease and refers both io persons and //////^j- whether they are in ih^ j/«^<^ror the plu- ral. For instance : Le garçon çui l'a fait, est parti, the boy who has done it, is pone. Les garçons çui l'ont fait, sont partis, the boys who have done it, are gone. 161 2. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Par exemple, Yoîci une robe de bal, que je par ëg-sângpl voâh-sëê un robe de bâhl kë je Tiens d'acheter pour moins de cinquante francs. vyaing dâsh-tay pour mo-aing de saing-kâng frâng. Par {par) exemple (eg-sàng-pî) [masc] voici^ {voàh-sëê) une robe de baP {un robe Je bâhl) que' {kë) Le livre qui est sur la table, est à mon frère, the book which is on the table, belongs to my brother. Les livres qui sont sur la table, sont à mon frère» the books which are on the table, belong to my brother. There is also only one relative pronoun for whom, 'nrhich and that when in the accusative case, viz., que ; as : Z'homme que vous avez vu, l'a fait, the man whom you saw has done it. / Le livre que vous avez lu, est à ma sœur, the book which you have read, belongs to my sister. Retnark : The French mtcst always express the relative, though we frequently omit it in English. 162 I come ; I am coming* from buying I have just bought (The literal translation is : / come from buy- ing). for less of fifty francs for less than fifty francs (Than after a comparative is usually expressed by que ; but after moins and plus we have to use de when a numeral follows, as is the case here). 3. I. Tell me the lowest price for (de) this bonnet. 2. Fifty francs, madam. i) Je viens, I come, I am coniiftg,\s the prrsenf fensc of ihe régulai verb venir of which the pupil may learn the following most impor- tant tenses : Present. Imperfect. Je viens (vyaing). Je venais {vê-nay'), tu viens (vyaing), tu venais, il vient {vyaing), il venait, nous venons {vë-nong), nous venions {vë-nvong), vous venez {vë-nêh), vous veniez {^'e-nyek), ils viennent {xyën). ils venaient {vë-Hay). 163 je viens ^ {vyaing) d'acheter (dâsh-tay) je viens d'acheter (The English 'just, just now* must be given by venir de, as : I have yW/ seen, je viens devoir \ I have just received, Je viens de recevoir). pour {pour) moins {nio-aing) A^idë) cinquante {saing-kâng) francs (/rang) pour moins de cinquante francs. 3. 1. Dites-moi le dernier prix de ce chapeau (lé dcr-nyëh pi'éé de se shà-po), 2. C'est cinquante francs, madame. Future. Conditional. Je viendrai {vyaing-drêh). Je viendrais {vyaing-dray), tu viendras {vyaing-dràh), tu viendrais, il viendra {vyaing-drâh), il viendrait, nous viendrons {vyaing-drong), nous viendrions {vyaing-drêé ong), vous viendrez {vyaing- drek), vous viendriez {vvaing-dréc-èJi), ils viendront {vyaing-di'ong), ils viendraient {vyaing-dray). Perfect. Phitierfect, Je suis venu (và-nu), &c. J'étais venu {vë-m'i), &c. Imperative. Viens {zyaing), venons {vé-nong), venez {vë-nch). 1(34 ;, . You will surely let me have it for forty ? ( = You will pass [vous passerez] it me well at forty [qua- rante])? 4. No madam, that is the lowest (c'est tout au juste). 5. I cannot let you have it at a lower figure. I never make any overcharges ( = I cannot give it you at less (d moins), I overcharge never, [ne — ja)nais ^]). 6. I can get (procurer) it cheaper somewhere else (ailleurs). 7. You are mistaken ( = you mistake yourself [votis vous trompez]), madam ; at least [du moins] you will get an inferior quality [une qiialité inférieure]). 8. We sell at stated prices only (ne — que). 9. Very well (eh hien), let us split ( = divide, parta- geons) the difference (le different). I will give you forty-five (quarantc-cinq) francs. 10. Quite impossible. We never ask too much. All our prices are marked (sent marqués) in plain figures (en chiffres conmis). 11. The postman (facteur) has just brought a letter for you ( = comes from bringing, &c.). 12. I just received this telegram and hope (fespire) its contents (contejiu) will prove satisfactory to you ( = will satisfy you, vous satisfera). 13. My brother has just sold his furniture (mobilier). I) Never is always expressed bv ue- jamais: nothing or not anything by ne - rien ; uo one. not any one by ne pcrM>une Ob 165 3. Vous me le passerez bien à quarante (àh kâh-rângt) ? % 4. Non, madame, c'est tout au juste {say toû tohjùst). 5. Je ne puis vous le donner à moins. Je ne surfais jamais^ (jàh-may). 6. Je peux me le procurer ailleurs à meilleur marché {prô-ku-rêh âh-yeùr àh më-yeûr màr-shay). 7. Vous vous trompez (trong-pêh)^ madame; du moins vous^aurez une qualité inférieure {un kàk-têi-tày aing-fay-ryeûr) . 8. Nous ne vendons qu'à prix fixe {ne vâng-dong kàh prêê fîx). 9. Eh bien, partageons le différent. Je vous donnerai quarante-cinq francs {par-tàh-Jong le dif-fay-râng. Je voû dôn-në-réh kâh-ràng saing frdng). 10. CGst^im^ossïhle, {taî7ig-pôh-séêbl). Nous ne surfaisons jamais {sùr-fay-zong j'à-may). Tous nos prix {prêê) sont marqués {ntâr-kay) en chiffres connus {àng shtfr côn-nii), 11. Le facteur vient d'apporter une lettre pour vous. 12. Je viens de recevoir ce télégramme et j'espère que son contenu {cong-të-nii) vous satisfera {sà-tîs-fe-ràJi). 13. Mon frère vient de vendre son mobilier {md-bëë-yëh). serve that ne must be always placed before the verb (withoiU pas ac- companying it). 16C Did I tell you that he is going {quHl va ^) to live in the country ? 14. It just struck nine. ( = Nine hours come from sound- 15. Is Mrs. L. within ? No, madam, she has just gone out. iG. Did you call on Mrs. T. ? 17. I went to her house, but did not find her. She had just gone out (trouvée must be placed in the femi- nine, because the auxiliary is preceped by la). 18. I just met (rencontrer) Mr. A. 19. Does he get on well (fait-il Men) in business ? 20. Yes, his business goes very well. 21. I have my breakfast every day ( = all the days, tous les jours) for less than two francs. 22. If it is later than (plus de) five o'clock, do not go to my physician's, for (car ') he is not at home, 23. I have bought for less than one franc some very beautiful (beau) writing paper {du papier d lettres) and five dozens (douzaines) of envelopes (d'enve- Joppes, i) Aller, to go, is an ^>r<§'«^r verb, the principal tenses of which the student viust know : Present. Imperfect. Je vais {vais). J'allais {jâ-lay), tu vas {va h), tu allais, il va {vâh), il allait, nous'^allons {zâ-long\ nous^allions {zâ Ivom^)^ vous^allez (eJ-ZM), vous^alliez (zâlyih\ ils vont {7'fltig). ils^allaieni {zn-îay). Future. Conditional. J'irai {jcc-rêh\ J'irais (/.v-wi'). lu iras {tii eê-nî/i), tu irais (<-V-/«y), 107 Vous^ai-je dit qu'il z^â:^ demeurer à la campagne {kdng-pàn-yè) ? 14. Neuf^heures viennent {vyén) de sonner. 15. Madame L. est ^elle clîcz^elle? Non Madame, elle vient de sortir (sor-teer). 16. Avez-vous^été A'oir Madame T. {iay)} 17. Je suis'^allé chez^elle, mais je ne l'ai pas trouvée. Elle venait (vë-nay) de sortir. 18. Je viens de rencontrer {râng-cong-tray) monsieur A. {dh). 19. Fait -il bien ses^afïaires ? 20. Oui, son commerce va très-bien. 21. J'ai tous les jours {toil lay jour) mon déjeuner pour moins de deux francs. 22. S'il est plus de cinq^heures, n allez pas chez mon médecin, car"^ il n'est pas chez lui. 23. J'ai acheté pour moins d'un franc {deûng /rang) du papier à lettres très-beau et cinq douzaines d'enve- loppes {du pàp-yëh àh lett tray boh ay saing doû-zayn dâng-vë-lôp). Future. Conditional. il ira {êêl ié-râh), il irait {êê-ray), nous^irons (zêê-rons;), nous'^irions {zêi ryong), vous^irez {zéê-rch), vous'^iriez {zèè-rycK), ils^iront {zi'J-rong\ ils'^iraient {zcâ-ray). Perfect. Pluperfect. Je suis'^allé. &c. J'étais'^allé. «&c. Imperati^fe. Va {vâh), go (thou), dMons {d- long) let us go, allez {à-lay\ go (vou). 2) The student must distinguish between /j--j-'z£/eine=donnêh voû là pain) to pass to the rear {au fond=^o\\ fong) of the store, sir? — 4) Will you please show (w^/z/r6'/'=mong-trêh) some cloth to the gentleman? — 5) What {quelle) sort of cloth do you wish, sir? — 6) Have you any samples {pr patterns) ? — 7) Yes, sir, here are {voici) samples of all the pieces of cloth {de tous les draps) which we have in stock. — 8) What is the price of this {cclui-ci) ? — 9) It costs twenty-five francs a metre {le metre— m^^ylx). — 10) That (p? = sah) seems rather dear to me. — n) I beg your pardon {par donnez-moi), sir, that {ce) is not dear for this {cette) quality. Feel {tâtez), if you please, how fine it is ( = how [comr/ie] it is fine= ^fi, faing). — ; 2) And that one {celui-là)^ what do you charge for that ( = of what price is it) ? — 13) The blue {ce bleu-là = sê bleu lâh) ? I could not {je ne pourrais=^]é ne poûr- ray) give it to you for {à) less than thirty {trente =\.ra.n^i) francs. — 14) That is very dear ; it does not seetn to me finer {plus ^n=p\\i faing) than {çu€) the other. — 15) You are right, sir; it is similar {sembla ale =i>^ng-blâ-b\) in {pour) quality {=t/ie quality) ; but blue {=t/ie blue) is al- ways a little dearer {plus cher) than other colors (=M^ other colors, couleurs). THE a mkntliiifi $pt^nv A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY ^reiitff, fermait, ^iwuisfî, and (ftalian, BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Lafe Dhe. tor of the " Akademie fût- frejitde Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the ^^ Meisterscka/t College'" in London, and Principal of the ^'" Meisterschaft School of Practical Lin^uistry'" in New York. FRENCH. IN FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. PART VI. NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK k CO., Publishers, lo AM) 12 Dey Strfiet. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened Ihc §rislcr^^ckft ^cljool of |raclical îinjuilfrj FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared by the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the menriber to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire \o study There arc no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise^ and questions must be written on a sepajate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, /f> nnd t'i 7>ri/ Streef. \r»r I'f.r.'c. ^^1^ Jpm^($^l|aît-f pt4w, FRENTCH PART ri. 180 VI. ( Continuation. ) 24. For less than a franc I bought in a large {grand) Vienna store {im magasin de Vienne), where every thing is sold (se vend^) very cheap, a quire ( = a hand, une main) of this English paper, some ex- cellent steel-pens {des plumes méfaUiqnes) and six dozens of envelopes. 25. You wish (or want) a silk dress, madam ? Will you please step up (monfei-) to the 'enfre-soV? 26. Have you received any beautiful novelties {non- veau tés) ? 27. lean suit your taste (or serve you to your taste). We have just received a very large assortment (assor- timent). 28. I do not like this shade (nuance) very much. I want something darker (pJtis foncé, i.e. with a deeper, richer color). 29. You have there (W) some brocaded silk (de ta soie moirée). Please let me see it (vot/o?is-Ia). 30. Here you are, madam. We have the same quality with a large satin stripe (d large raie satinée). 31. It is the most beautiful thing you can see. I. The passive voice is often expressed by the activt with se. 181 VI. (Continuation.) 24. J'ai acheté pour moins d'un franc dans un grand magasin de Vienne où tout se vend"^ très-bon marché, une main {un maing) de ce papier anglais, des plumes métalliques excellentes {day pliim may-tà-îêëk zeg-sèl- làngt) et six {sëë) douzaines d'enveloppes {doû-zayn dàng-vë-lôp). 35. C'est^une robe de soie que vous désirez {day-zee-ray)^ madame? Veuillez monter à l'entre-sol {Idng-tr-sôl)} [The entre-sol is an apartment between the ground- floor and the first story.] 26. Avez- vous reçu de belles nouveautés {noû-voh-tay) ? 27. Je puis vous servir {sër-vëër) à votre goût. Nous venons de recevoir un très-grand'^assortiment {tàs* sor-tëë-piàng), 28. Cette nuance {nii-àngs) ne me plaît pas trop. Je dé- sire quelque chose de plus foncé {fong-say). 29. Vous avez là de la soie moirée {m'woàh-ray). Voyons- la {voàh-yong Idh), s'il vous plaît. 30. Voici, madame. Nous'^avons la même qualité à large raie satinée {ray sà-tëë-nay). 31. C'est tout ce qu'on peut voir de plus beau. [Idiomatic phrase which is used very frequently.] 182- 32. Is this Lyons-silk? 33. Certainly (certainemeiit), madam. It would be im- possible to find similar goods (pareille marchandise) among {dans) English products {les produits d'Angle- terre). 34. Will you please give me your address and I will send the package {le paquet). 35. I should like to have some writing- {or note) paper (pajjier d lettres), sir. 36. You wish small-sized paper {petit format)^ madam ? 37. How do you sell tjie quire (/«/«rn"») of this English paper ? 38. We sell a great deal (beaucoup) of this paper to a number (or several, plusieurs) of offices. 39. Show me some good steel-pens (plumes métalliques). 40. How do you sell the gross (la grosse) by the box ? 41. "I should like to see ( = to have) some linen (de ht toile) for shirts. 42. Do you want something nice (or ben 1 it if nil ^ 43. Of the best quality. 44. Here is some Dutch linen (de la toile de Hollande) which is excellent. 45. How do you sell it .' 46. Four francs a metre. 47. A dozen would cost me (?ne reviendra) therefore (ainsi) ? 48. You will (sun/v) make me a reduction (mit diminu- tion) on the price. 183 32. Est-ce là de la soie de Lyon {lêê-ong) ? 33. CQict^ineuiQwt {sêr-tain' 'md7ig) madame; il serait^ira- possible {taing-pos-sécbl) de trouver 4)areille marchan- dise {pà-rè-yë màr-shàng-decze) dans les produits d'Angleterre [prd-dwéét dàng-lët-tayr). 34. Veuillez me donner votre'^adresse et je vous'^enverrai le paquet {je voû zàng-vér-rêh lé pà-kay). 35. Je voudrais^avoir du papier {pàpyëJi) à lettres, mon- sieur, 36. Est-ce petit format {formâh) que vous désirez, ma- dame ? 37- Combien vendez-vous {yàng-day-vou) la main [maing) de ce papier anglais ? 38. Nous vendons beaucoup de ce papier à plusieurs {plii-z' yeûr) bureaux (bu-roh). 39. Montrez-moi de bonnes plumes métalliques {^này- tà-léêk). 40. Combien vendez-vous la grosse en boîte i^àng b'woàt) ? 41. Je voudrais^avoir de la toile pour chemises {twoàhl pour shë-mëëze). 42. Voulez-vous quelque chose de beau {bo) ? 43. De la meilleure qualité {iiië-yêur kâ-lëë-tay). 44. Voici de la toile de Hollande qui est'^excellente {tëg-sèl-làngt), 45. Combien la vendez-vous ? 46. Quatre francs le mètre {mayt'r). 47. Ainsi la douzaine me reviendra [aing-sëë là doû-zayn me rë-vyaing-dt'o) ?^ 48. Vous me ferez bien une diminution {dëi-??iëë-nù-syong) sur ce prix [prëë). 184 2. Terms of politeness.^ A. Tenus of askiuff. I. May I ask (or beg) you to tell me ? ^. May I ask a favor of you ? .3. I have to make a request of you. 4. Be so kind (or Have the kindness) to tell me .... ^. I have to ask you for a favor. 6. Would you be so kind as to do me a service ? 7. If I were not afraid of troubling you [attire indiscret) I would beg you to. . . . 8. Would you have the kindness to. . . ..^ 9. Would you be so kind as to grant me {de m'accor- der) a moment's conversation {or interview) J 10. If it were convenient to you to. . . . 11. Do me this favor. 12. I beg (you) for it. 13. You would greatly oblige me if . . . . i) These phrases will be found rerj useful in every day conver- sation. I have often observed that foreigners are at a loss how to express themselves gracefully and naturally, not knowing how to make use of the words they really have mastered, and I beg that stu- 185 2. Formules de politesse.^ A, Formules de demmide {for-miil dé de-màngd). 1. Puis-je vous demander (d7r pner = preê-ëh) de me dire (dêêr) .... ? 2. Pourrais-je vous demander une faveur (dé-màng-dêh un fd-veûr)1 3. J'ai une prière {prêë-air) à vous faire. 4. Ayez la bonté {ay-yêh là bong-tay) de me dire .... 5. J'ai une grâce à vous demander. 6. Voudriez-vous me rendre un servicq {râng-dr eûng sér-vëës)} I 7. Si je ne craignais pas {crën-yay pàJi) d'être\|^ndiscret {atng-dis-cray)y je vous prierais de {je voû-prëë-ë-rëh de),,:, i Auriez-vous la bonté de .... ? ( Auriez-vous l'obligeance de. . . .? 9. Auriez-vous la bonté de m'accorder un moment d'en- tretien (nio-màng dàng-tr' -tyaing) (or un moment d'au- dience \do-dyângs\)'i 10. S'il vous convenait de ... . 1 1. Faites-moi ce plaisir. 12. Zo.yoM^'^QVi.^xiç.^jê voûzcing prëë), 13. Vous m'obligeriez (mo-blëë-jê-ryëH) beaucoup (or infini- ment \aing-fëë-nëë-màng^ si. . . . dents will study these phrases very thoroughly, as they are continu- ally used in polite society, and serve to introduce various requests and statements. Similiar phrases will be given in the succeeding parts. 180 14- Count on (suf) my gratitude. • 15. I should be very grateful (reconnaissant) to you if 16. Would you please repeat what you were saying? 17. I beg your pardon, sir? 18. What was it you said, madam ? 19. Please, listen to me (écoutez moi). FOUNDATION SENTENCE. As I muBt leave for Germany to-night, I should be yery much obliged to you, if you were to ask him to please send me the patterns at once, which I selected three days ago. 1. As I am obliged to leave for Germany to-night. i) Liquid sound. 2) o-a is only one sound. 18V 14. Comptez sur ma reconnaissance (cong-tay sur ma rê- cô nais-sângs). 15. Je vous serais très-reconnaissant (rë-co?i-nai-sàng) si. . 16. Veuillez répéter ce que vous^avez dit [dêê ) ? 17. Plaît-ii (//^j^-//t'/), monsieur ? 18. Y OMS é'isiQZ {l'oû diê-zyê h), vciîid^vcie} i Ecoutez- moi {ay-kôd-tëh in'woâh)^ s'il vous plaît. ( Daignez m 'écouter [dain-yëh juay-coû-tay). 19. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Comme il faut que j'aille en Allemagne ce soir, kôm ëël loh ké jâ yë ' âng â-lë mân-yë se swoâr'^ je vous serais bien obligé si vcns lui demandiez je voQ sëray by^aing ob-lëê-jay sëë voû lii ëë ^ de mâng-dyëh de m'envoyer sur-le-champ les^échantillons que dé mângvoâh-yëh siir le shâng lay zay-shâng-tëë-yong kë j*ai choisis il y a trois jours. jay sh'woâh-zëë ëël ëë â tro-âh jour 1. Comme il faut que j'aille en Allemagne ce soir. kôm ëël fôh kë jâ yê âng a-lë-mân-yë se s'woâr. 3) ii-êê is only one sound. 188 As it is necessary Présent : il faut iJôHS. Part, passé: fallu. Imp.: il fallait. Futur: il faudra 07/-^rrt>^). Défini: il fallu. Prés. Subj.: qu'il faille [kêêl fd-ye). English expressions as ' I must; we are obliged,' &c., must be rendered by * il faut ' '). that I may go I go; I am going; (thou goest ; he goes, &c.) I shall {or I will) go that I may go (that thou maysl go, that he may go, that we may go, that you may go, that they may go) I must go, or I am obliged to leave for {aller must be followed by en when one travels to countries, as : Je vais en Angleterre) Germany. 1. Mr. Daudet has gone {or left) ; and that is the rea- son why his brothers must go to France. 2. Did you not tell any one why I am obliged to go to England ? 3. How much must I pay to the cab } i) Rule : " il faut ' is used in the following way : a) With the simple infinitive : il faut travailler (I, he, we, you, <7r they) must work. b) With a personal conjunctive prentoun and the infimtive: il me faut vendre, I must sell ; il nous faut aller, we must go ; il vous faut partir, you must leave. c) With que and the subjunctive mood : Il faut que faille, I must go. II faut que le tailleur /«jj^t* mon habit, the tailor must make my coat. II faut que je dontu ce livre à votre frère. I must give thi5 book to your brother. 189 Comme {kom) il faut^ {ëël fôK) (Is an irregular verb derived from the infinitive, falloir. It is used only in the third person singular) que j'aille (kë-jà-ye) (Prés. Sub jonc, of the irregular verb a/Z^rr) je vais (Present of aller), tu vas ils vont) j'irai {jêé-rçà) (Future of aller) que j'aille, que tu ailles, quM vous^^alliez, qu'ils' il faut que j'aille (ëël fôh ke jâ-ye) en {àng) {aller is followe( Je vais à Londre Allemagne {à-lë-nmn-yé) je vais (Present of aller), tu vas, il va, nous'^allons, vous^allez, ils vont) que j'aille, que tu ailles, qu'il aille, que nous'^allions, que vous^^alliez, qu'ils'^aillent {këél zà-yé) en {ang) {aller is followed by à, when one travels to towns, as Je vais à Londres) Monsieur Daudet {dô-day) est parti; c'est pourquoi il faut que ses frères aillent en France {à-yë âftg f rangs). N'avez-vous dit à personne pourquoi il faut que j'aille en Angleterre (àn-nàng-glë-tayr) ? Combien faut-il que je donne ' au cocher (don ôh cô-shay) ? Any of these constructions may be used when the subject of the sentence happens to be a pronoun But the third construction only is admissible when the subject is a noun. 2) The pupil must now make himself familiar with the sub- junctive mood. He ought now to learn, or rather to repeat all the iensQS oi avoir, être zxvà donner. Then take finir (2d conjugation), and vendre (3d conjugation), which are gitren in the Grammatical Remarks of Part VI. A table giving the principal peculiarities of the French grammar accompanies the next lessons. 190 4. As I am obliged to go to Paris, please tell your brother to give me this address. 5. Where must I go this forenoon ? 6. Tell him, if you please that he must make my coat to-day. 7. That must be so. 8. What must I get for dinner, madam ? 9. The shoemaker must make my boots at once, as (parce que) I am going to leave. 10. What.' You did not hear the thunder .' {Literally: the clap \le coup^ of thunder [de tonnerre']) ? You must sleep [que vous dormiez ^J very heavily [profondément]). 11. Must I send the silk and velvet (le velours) to your house.? 12. Am I obliged to pay beforehand (d'avance) ? 13. • What do you need ? [II faut signifies also to need^ 14. Waiter, give me another room. I need more air and light (/. ^., day-light — jou?'). 15. I need some money. . 16. How much do you need (or are you in need of) ? 17. I need 33 (trente-trois) francs. 18. Did you breakfast ? 19. I took (fai pris) a cup ot coffee with milk. l) Learn the suhitnutivf mooii of the /r^-j*»»/ of faire : Que je fasse, that I may make, que nous fassions, that we mav make, que tu fasses , to finish. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Fim'o% finish. finissons {fêë'nt-song)y let us finish. finissezy finish. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Que je finisse (fêê-nïss), that I (may) finish. que tu finisses, &c. qu'il finisse, &c. que nous finissions, that we (may) finish. que vous finissiez, &c. qu'ils ûnisse}it {/ëê-mss), &c. 194 Imperfect. Que je finisse, that I (might) finish. que tu finisses, &c. qu'il finît {fêê-nêë), &c. que nous finissio7is, that we (might) finish. que vous finissiez^ &c. qu'ils finisse?it (fêê-jiîss)^ &c. PARTICIPLES. Present. Past. FinissflfM/, finishing. Fini (fêê-nêê),/. fin/V, en finissant, by finishing, &c. finished. COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. Avoir fini {fëê-nêê), to have finished. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect. J'ai fini (fêë-nëë)^ I have finished. tu as fini, thou hast finished. il a fini, he has finished. nous avons fini, we have finished, &c. Pluperfect. J'avais fini, I had finished, &c. Compound of the Preterite. J'eus fini, I had finished, &c. 195 2d Future. J'aurai fini, I shall have finished, &c. 2d CondiiionaL J'aurais fini , ^ . \\ should have finished, &c. J eusse nni SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect. Que j'aie fini, that I (may) have finished, &c. Pluperfect. Que j'eusse fini, that I (might) have finished, &c. PARTICIPLES. Ayant fini, having finished, &c. Conjugate in the same manner: bâtir, to build; choisir, to choose ; remplir {ràng-pleer), to fill, &c. Remarks. i) The verb ha"ii\ to hate, loses in the Present and Imperative singular its diœresis. Otherwise it is quite reg- ular and retains the two dots. Près. Je hais, tu hais, il hait, nous haïssons, vous haïssez, &c. Imper. Hais ; PI. haïssons, haïssez. Prêt. Je haïs .1 hated. 2) The verb fleurir, to flourish, has a second form for the Imperfect tense, Je florissais, and also a second for thç Part, present, florissant, e, both of which are only used in a figurative sense, as : une ville florissante, a flourish- ing city, &c. 196 Third Conjugation : Tendre, to sell.* INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Je vends {vàngd)^ I sell. nous vendow5, we sell, tu vend*', thou sellst. vous vendez, you sell, il vend, he sells. ils vende»/ (vângd)^ ) they elle (on)vend, she (one) sells, elles vendent, f sell. Imperfect. Je vend«i5 {vdng'day\ I sold, nous wQuaions, we sold, tu vendrt/s, thou soldst. vous vend/ez, you sold, il vendaiï, he sold. ils vend«te?i/, they sold. Preterite. Je vendît {vâng-dëê)^ I sold, nous vcnàtmes, we sold. tu vendis, &c. vous vendî/es, &c. il vendit, &c. ils vendirent {vâng-dêêr\ &c. Future, Je vendrrtt (vâng-drëh)^ I nous vendrons, we shall sell. shall sell, tu vendras, &c. vous vendrez, &c. il vendra, &c. ils vendro/i^ &c. i) Pronounce vàngrdr ; nous vendons = vâng-dong ; ils vendent = vâns'-d, &c. 197 jst Conditional, Je vendra/^, {vdng-dray), I nous \endrionSy we should should sell. sell, tu vendrû^is, &c. vous vendne^;, &c. il YQïiùraity &c. ils wQwdraienty &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Vends, sell. vendons, let us sell. vender;, sell. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Que je vende {vângd)^ that I (may) sell, que tu vendes, &c. qu'il vende, &c. que nous vend/ows, &c. que vous vendî'e;?, &c, qu'ils VQïi&enty &c. Imperfect. Que je vendisse {vàng-dtss)^ that I might sell, que tu vendisses, &c. qu'il vendf^, &c. que nous \endission$, &c. que vous vendissiez?, &c. qu'ils vendissent, &c. PARTICIPLES. Présent, Passé, Vendant, selling. vendw {vâng-du\ f, vendwe, en vendant, by selling. 198 COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. Avoir vendu, to have sold. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect. J'ai vendu, I have sold. tu as vendu, thou hast sold. il a vendu, he has sold. nous avons vendu, we have sold, &c. Pluperfect. J'avais vendu, I had sold, &c. Preterite. J'eus vendu, I had sold, &c. 2d Future. J'aurai vendu, I shall have sold, &c. 2d Conditional. J'aurais vendu, ) ^ , , , , , , o -^ \\ should have sold, 6cc. J'eusse vendu, * SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect. Que j'ai vendu, that I (may) have sold, &c. Pluperfect. Que j'eusse vendu, that I (might) have sold, &c. PARTICIPLE. Ayant vendu, having sold. Conjugate after this model: perdre, to loose : attendre (ât-tàng-dr), to wait, to expect ; répondre, to answer, &c. 199 The most Important Verbs of the First Conjugation.— Contiiined. TYix\ter{tray-fê/i), to treat. maltraiter (^màhl-tray-tëJi)^ to illtreat, to abuse. pleurer {pleû-rêJi), to weep. soupirer {soiï-pêë-rêh), to moan. consoler [co?ig-sdh-léh), to console. regretter (rè-grêt-tëh)^ to re- gret. pardonner {pàr-don-nêh), to pardon. excuser (ex-cil-zëh)^ to ex- cuse. venger {vàng-Jëh), to re- venge. railler (rd-yëhy^ to joke, to make fun of. toucher {toû-shëh), to touch. goûter [goû-tëh), to taste. regarder {t'é-gâr-dëh), to re- gard. écontQY {ay-coû-tëh), to listen to. aller (à-lëh), to go. marcher ( mâr-shëh ), to walk. retourner {rê-toûr-nëh)^ to return. rencontrer {ràng-cong-trëJi)^ to meet, to encounter. échapper {ay-shâp-pëh\ to escape. sauter {sôh-tëh), to jump. tomber {tong-bëJi)^ to fall. danser {dâng-sëh), to dance. jouer (Joiï-ëh), to play. vaontQT (7fiong-tëh), to mount, to bring up stairs ; to get in. songer (so'jg-Jëh)^ to dream. rêver [ray-vëh), to dream. manger {lîiàng-Jëh), to eat. déjeuner {day -Je il -ne h), to breakfast. dîner {dëë-nëh), to dine. souper {soû-pëh)^ to sup. mâcher {mâh-shëh), to chew. régaler (ray-gà-lëJi)^ to re- gale, to treat. couper {kôô-pëh), to cut. découper {day-kdô pëh), to carve, to cut up. allumer {à-lu-mëh), to light. fumer (fù-f?tëh), to smoke. bâiller {bâ-yëh)^ to yawn. siffler {sîf-flëh)y to whistle. tousser (toûs-sëh)^ to cough. 200 traîner (tray-nëh), to puil. trembler {trâng-blêh)y to tremble, .tirer {iêê-rêh), to draw, to drag, montrer (mong-trëh)^ to show, présenter (pray-zàng-iëh) to present, accepter {àc-cèp-têh)^ to ac- cept, gâter (gâh-tëh)j to spoil, jeter (j'é-têh)^ to throw, to throw away, ramasser {rà-niàs-seh), to pick up. chercher (shêr-shêh), to seek, to search, trouver {troil-vt-h), to find, cacher (cà-s'hëh), to hide, nettoyer (nèt-fwjà-yëh), to clean, déchirer (day-shëë-reh)^ to tear. ^ briser (brëë-zëh), to pick to pieces, porter (por-tëh)^ to carry, apporter (âp-por-tëh)^ to bring. along. mener {më-nëk)^ to lead. voyager (vod-yà-j'ay), to tra- vel. arriver (àr-rëë-vëh)^ to ar- rive. sonner (son-nih) to strike (of the clock), to ring (the bell). entrer (âng-trëh), to enter. ' lermer (fer-mëh), to lock. marchander {màrshàng-dëh) to bargain. commander {côm-mâng-dèh)^ to order, to command. envoyer (âng-voâh-yëh)^ to send, to forward. renvoyer {râng-voâh-yëh) to send back. dédommager (day-dom-màh^ jay), to idemnify. acheter (âsh-tëh), to buy. prêter (pray'tëh)y to lend, to loan. emprunter {àng-preûng-têh\ to borrow. rembourser (râng-boûr-sëh\ to reimburse, to repay. débourser (day-boûr-sëh), to disburse, to pay out. amener (i-w/-»<^*), to bring\. bonifier {bô-nti-fyëh)^ to better. 201 payer {pay-yëh)^ to pay. empaqueter {àng-pà-kë-tëh)^ to pack up. dépaqueter {day-pà-ke-tëh)^ to unpack. envelopper {âng-vè-lop-pëh), to envelop, to wrap up. gagner (gân-yëh), to gain. tromper (trong-pëh)^ to de- ceive. voler {vôh-lëh), to steal. étudier (ay-tii-dyëh), to study compter (ko ng-tëh) to coxxni, to reckon. chiffrer [shïf-frëh), to reck- on. additioner {ad-dëë-syon-nëh), to add. multiplier {mul-tëë-plëë-ëh)^ to multiply. diviser (dëë-vëë-zëh), to di- vide. copier (kô-pyëh)^ to copy. signer (sin-yëh)^ to sign. dieter {du-tëh), to dictate. plier {plëë-ëh)y to put to- gether. plisser {plts-seh) to fold. cacheter {càsh-tëh\ to seal. commencer {com-mâng-sëh)^ to commence, to begin. continuer {cong'tëë-nu-ëh\ to continue. cesser {sës-sëK)^ to cease. achever {à-she-vëh), to per- fect, to fulfil. travailler (trâ-và-yëh), to work. colorer {co-lo-rëh)^ to color. dessiner {dè-sëë-nëJi)^ to de- sign. laver {lâ-vëh)^ to wash. e n regi St r e r ( àng-ray-jîs-irëJi)^ to book, to check. peser (pë-zëh)^ to weigh. planter (plàng-tëJi)^ to plant Observation. The student will see that most of these French verbs, which are originally derived from the Latin, are also found in the English tongue, though our pronunciation differs materially from the French. The pupil, with very little effort, can, therefore, put himself in possession of i6o of the most necessary French verbs. 202 Translate the following Exercise into English, and then render it into French without the help of the book : I. On a Steamer. i) Quand le bateau à vapeur (bû-tô âh \ri-peûr=sUamer)f partira-t-il (par-tee-rcl-teel=^6'///^ /o leave ; start) ? — Le ba- teau partira dans^une heure. — 2) Quel est le prix du passage ? — Les premières places {piâ/is) sont de deux gui- nées et les secondes d'une guinée. — 3) Est-ce que tout est prêt (pray^rm^/j^)? — Oui, monsieur. — Eh bien, allons à bord! — 4) Nous voici. Voyez (woah-y^h = look ; see) quelle heure il est, pour savoir (sâ-v'\voâr = /// order to knoîv) combien de temps nous^'aurons^été à la traversée (trâ-ver-say = crossing). — Il est deux^'heures précises. — 5) Combien de temps serons-nous en voyage.' — Hiiit'^heures, je crois (kroâli = / t/iink), si le temps (weather) est favorable (fâ-vô-râbl = favorable). — 6) Avez-vous déjà été sur mer (on sea) ? — 7) Oui, monsieur. Et vous ? — J'ai été aussi (ô-sëë =also ) plusieurs fois (plu- zyeûr-foâh =.sv'7'é'r^/ /'/w<\t) sur mer; mais je ne suis pas sujet (s\i-]ay = s ubjeet) au mal de mer (seasiekness). — 8) Vous changez (shâng-jay) de couleur. Qu'avez-vous.' — La tête me tourne (ichtrls ; sivims); j'ai mal au coeur. — 9) Vous paraissez (pâ-rays-sëh = seem) vous trouver mal (to feel fiad); ne vaudrait - il pas mieux (ne vô- dray-tëël pâh myeû = 7».'ou d it not be better) de rentrer (râng-tray) dans la cajute (kâ-jiit = cainn) et de vous coucher (lay do^vn) ? — Je préfère ( pray-fayr = prefer) rester sur le pont (pong = deck). COMPANION TO THE ^eôtament. Made on the ^eVîôed ^crôîon of the Çev^ Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Authorized Version. . BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Eevision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BT À MEUBEB OF THE AMEBICÂN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the ReviPion of the Work and Co-operation of the New Testament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Oifference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons whi>:h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Commiitees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English CommiUee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, iays of this book: " Many persons have expressed a desire that, simultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons ior such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. RoberU is exactly fitted to meet this desire.... Nowhere else in print can be found a statement so full and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers. New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers wouid have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover all the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be loht. ....AH thisiss-t forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have ary intelligent interest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this little book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every men. her of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful rcadinj;, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-clas.ses." "So valuable, intetestingr and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to k;iow the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtaiu it immediately." — Aea/ York Observer. Taper, 8vo size, S5 cents ; Clotli, IGmo, 75 cents» #*;,( For Sa'e by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK AGO., PubHshers, 10& 12Doy St.. N.Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full. Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come to consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent wiih accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will rese'nble the Bagster Bible, " Fac sim'.le large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices uiithin the reach of all. Thi; "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, including the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de in the '* Bagster Bibles,'' with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be miN'TED in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King Jimes version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the mo-t carefully prepared helps to the study of the revised New Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Pop'ilar Cloth Edition— !lead7 in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.60. Send for prospectus gii'ittg full description and prices of finer Bktdings, I.K. FUNK&CO., Publishers, 10 and 12 Dey S:., How York. THE ^P^bJer^cljaft $ptcn|. A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY Jtreiirfj, ^ertt(an, ^piiui$l{, mû (Italian, BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Laftr Director of the " Akadnnie fih- frcmde Sprnchen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the ''^ Meisterschaft College'^ in London, and Principal o/ the ''^ Meisterscha/t School of Practical I. ingu^stry" in Meiv York. FRENCH. L\ FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINLXG THREE LESSONS. PART VII. NEW YORK : I. K. FUNK k CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened l^lie Heisier^'ckft mhd of Practical Jinguiltr^ FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared by the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire \o study There are tw extra charges. The price, Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise and questions must be written on a sepaiate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Posi-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK c^ CO, if> nml I'i T>rtj Strerf. Xf*r Y^nk. %kt Sfut$tf$#ft-$pt^ttt, FREISrCH. PART rii. VII.» ( Continuation. ) 20. That is not sufficient {assez); you must eat some- thing before dinner. {Literally: While [«/i*] await- ing \cittendant'\ the dinner). 21. Have you any wine.^ Yes, sir; I have some. 22. If you need good sugar, we can furnish (four7iir) you some at a very low price. 23. Show me some good steel pens. Here are some excellent ones. 24. Waiter, I have no napkin. Here is one, sir. 15. I do not like this room. Have you not (got) another one which you can give me ? {Literally : to give to me.) 16. Yes, sir, we have several {plusieurs) unoccupied ones (=: several free [de libres]). 1) To avoid breaking up the several tables in the Grammatical Remarks they have been consolidated into one part, thus shortening the Foundation Sentences for this Number. 2) En is a 'supplying pronoun,' and is used very frequently in French-, though it cannot always be given in English. It is used a) to express the words sooi^ and any, when ihey refer to some previously used substantive, as: Voici du jambon (ham): fn voulez- vous? Donnez m'en, s'il vous plaît. Ht-re is some ham; do you want some ? Give me somtr, please. b) En is used instead of if or //;^w, when the French verb re- quires «iV (/.<•., governs the genitive). This rule refers almost only to things, rarely to persons. (It is immaterial what preposition is used in English.) Ex. : Vous parlez de son m.ilheur {ma-Uur^'i VII. {Continuation.) 20. Ce n'est pas^assez ; il vous faut manger (inàng-jay) quelque chose, en attendant {àn-nât-tàftg-ddng) le dîner. 21. Avez-vous du vin (vai?ig)} Oui monsieur, j'en ^ ai (Jàn-nai). 22. S'il vous faut de bon sucre, nous pouvons vous^en fournir i^foiir-nëër) à bien bon-marché. 23. Montrez-moi de bonnes plumes métalliques. En voici d'excellentes {de^-sèl-làngt). 24. Garçon, je n'ai pas de serviette. En voici une, mon- sieur. {^En^ can frequently not be expressed in English, but must be given in Erenr/i.) 25. Cette chambre ne me plait pas. N'en avez-voùs pas""une autre à me donner {nàn-nà-vëh voie pàh ziin nôtr àh me don-né h) ? 26. Oui, monsieur, nous^en^avons plusieurs de libres {plU-zyeûr de Icëbr). Non monsieur, je nV« parle pas. You are speaking of his misfort- une ? No, sir ; I am not speaking of it. — J'ai fait une faute {fô/it), Gif en suis puni {pii-ncë). I lîave committed a fault and I am punished for it, — Vous m'avez rendu service {rang dû sër-viésé); je vous en remercie {rë-mêr-sée). You have rendered me a service ; I thank you for it. En is always placed before the verb (like the personal conjunc- tive pronouns). But when en meets with another personal pronoun it is placed last, as : Je m'en souviens {soii-vyaing)^ I remember. It is placed, however, after the affirmative imperatii^e, as : Donnez-lui- en, give him some. {Moi and toi with the affirmative imperative are changed into /«' and /' before en, as : Donnez-m'en, give me some. 206 ?7- Do you need a large room, or will you be satisfied (voîis content erez-voUt<) with a {d'une) room {piece) w^ith (rt) one window ? 28. I have received a letter from Paris and must answer it at once. » 29. Will you please do your correspondence {/aire votre courrier) in the coffee-room ? You will find writing materials there. {Literally : You find there [?/] every- thing which you need for writing.) 30. It is of the utmost importance (= il faut ^cltsolument) that this letter leaves to-day. 31. Waiter, a decanter of ice-water {une carafe frappée)^ if you please. 33. We have not got any, sir, but I'll bring you {or get you) some ice {de la glace) on a plate, if you like it. ^:^. This roast duck is excellent. May I help you to some? {VoKS en servirai-je?) [May I, in such and similiar phrases, must be rendered through the fu- ture tense.] 34. This roast-beef looks ver)- nice. Will you please cut me a slice of it {m''e)i couper nne tranche)? 35. This meat {cette viande) is very tender ; may I offer you another small piece {un petit morceau) ? ,6. Give me a very small piece only {seulement). . You are giving me too much (tmu^ • «tîv.> m,- r.nTv {ne-que) half of it {la moitié), 38. Do you want a fork ? Thanks, I have one. 39. I must go to London for some weeks {semainejn) on f:iniilv-bii!=;ine.>;>^ ( ?)i)f/r irfLiirr'i ih' t'l.ninA. • 207 2 7. Vous fauf^il une grande chambre, ou vous conten- terez-vous i^cong-tàfig-té-rëh-vou) d'une pièce à une fenêtre (diin pêë-ays dJi un fè-naytr) ? 28. J'ai reçu une lettre de Paris et il faut que je réponde tout de suite {ray-pongd toi'it swëêi). 29. Veuillez faire votre courrier dans la salle des voya- geurs; vous'^y {voû-zëe) trouverez tout ce qu'il faut pour écrire (ay-kréêr). 30. Il faut^absolument {tàb-so-lu-màng) que cette lettre parte aujourd'hui. 31. Garçon, une èarafe frappée, s'il vous plaît. 32. Nous n'en'^avons pas, monsieur, mais si vous voulez je vous'^apporterai de la glace sur une assiette, 2iZ' Ce caneton (kà-në-tong) esf^excellent ; vous^en servi- rai-je encore {ay-tëg-sël-làng ; voû zdng- sër-vëë-rëh-jê àng-kor), 34. Ce filet a très-bonne mine ; veuillez m'en couper une tranche {t rangs h) ? 35. Cette viande {vëë-àngd) est très-tendre {tàng-dr\ vous^en offrirai-je encore un petit morceau {voûzàng nôf-frëë-rëh-jë àng-kor eûng p'tëe mor-soK) ? 36. Donnez-m'en seulement {seùl-màng) un tout petit morceau. 37. Vous m'en donnez trop; ne m'en donnez que la moi- tié {mwoâh-tyëh). 38. Voulez-vous^une fourchette ? Merci, j'entai une. 39. Il faut que j'aille à Londres pour quelques semaines {së-mayn) pour affaires de famille {fd-niëë-yë). 208 GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. A. The Adjective. The adjective agrees in gender and number with the substantive or pronoun it relates to. Le âo/i ^en{a,nt {bon nà?ig-fâng), the good child. La bonne femme (/à/n), the good woman. £://e ç^s\r heureuse {el lay teû-reûse)^ she is happy. Formation of the Feminine Form. The feminine of adjectives and participles is generally- formed by the addition of the letter e. Fun. vraie, jolie, connu ■âht)y généra ing) charm: Exceptions. Adjectives ending in e mute remain unchanged in the feminine, as : Masc. Fem. sage, sage, aimable {ay-màhbt), aimable. Masc. Fem. vrai, vraie. true. joli. jolie. pretty. connu. connue. known. général {jay-nay- râht). générale, general. charmant {shâr-mâng) charmante. charming. wise, amiable. Adjectives ending in /, change / into re in the feminine. Masc. Fem. 2sX\{ {âc-têêf\ active, active, bref, brève, short, neuf, neuve, new. vif(trty), vive, quick. 209 Adjectives ending in / double it in the feminine : Masc. Fern. cruel {ki'ii-êl), cruelle, cruel, pareil {pà-re-ye) pareille, similar, nul {niihl), nulle, no or null, éternel, {ay-ter-nél)^ éternelle, eternal, gentil {Jâno-téël\ gentille {jâng-têé-yé), pretty, tel, telle, such, vermeil [ver-mé-yè), vermeille, vermilion. In the same manner monosyllables in s, n and / are formed ; viz., doubling s, n and / in the feminine : Masc. Fern. bon {bong), bonne, {bomt). good. gros {gro). grosse {gross). . big. sot {so). sotte {soit), stupid. To these belong also the following: épais {ay-pay), fern, épaisse, thick. eyi-çxQS {ex-pray), fern, expresse, express, muet {mu-ay), fern, muette, dumb. • sujet {sii-jay) fern, sujette, subject. Adjectives ending in x change the same into se: Masc. Fern. heureux {eû-reû), heureuse {eû-reùse), happy, jaloux {jâ-lou), jalouse {jâ-loûse), jealous, paresseux {pâ-rës-seu), paresseuse {pa-rë-seùse), lazy. 'QxxX.fayx (/à), false, makes its feminine/<3;//^^^ {foss). Adjectives ending in er and ef take in the feminine the grave accent : Masc. Fern. léger {lay-jay), légère {lay-jayr), light. complet {cong-pîéh), complète {cong-playt), complete. 210 Of the adjectives ending in c the following three chansre this c into che : Masc. Fem. blanc [blângk). blanche {bldngsh) white franc {frângk), franche {/rângsh), frank. sec {seek) sèche {saysh). dry. thers ending in c take que : Masc. Fem. public {pu-blêêk), publique, public. turc {tiirk). turque. Turkish. caduc {kâ-duk\ caduque, decrepit. grec {gf'c'k), grecque, Greek. The following adjectives do not follow any of the above rules : Masc. Fem. long, longue. long. aigu (ai-gû). aiguë. acute. frais i/ray), fraîche (/ray s A), fresh. doux {(fâà\ douce {(/oâs). sweet, soft. malin {iftà-laing\ maligne {ma/cen-y/X wicked. bénin {àai-naing). bénigne {bai-nêên-yé), benign. The following are more irregular in the formation of their feminine, as: Masc. Fem. Beau [bel] {bôh), belle, beautiful, nouveau [nouvel] (jioû-vôh), nouvelle {noû-vêl), new. mou [mol] {moû), molle {môll), soft, fou [fol] ifoù), folle {foil), foolish, vieux [vieil] {zycù), vieille {zyë-yè), old. N.B. The above words in parentheses, bel., twuvel^ etc.. are used before masculine nouns beginning with a voivel or h mute, as: un bel^arbre, a fine tree; un nouvel jDrdre., a new order; unfoljcspoir, a foolish hope, etc. 211 Of the Plural of Adjectives. The rules given for the plural of substantives apply also to adjectives. Ex.: Grand,/", grande ; grand, gras, /. grasse ; fat. xo)2\{i'odh-yâhl), f. royale; royal, beau {boh), f. belle ; beautiful, vieux {vyeu), f. vieille {vyë-yë) ; old. Plural. grands, /. grandes, gras, f. grasses, xoyaîix {7'oâh-yoh), f. royales, beaux {Iw/i), f. belles, vieux, f. vieilles. Fou, mou and bieu (blue) make in the plural fous, mous and bleus. Position of Adjectives in a Sentence. Adjectives are generally placed after the nouns which they qualify ; as, for instance : le tailleur français, the French tailor, l'homme heureux {eû-reu)^ the happy man. de l'eau fraîche, some fresh water. But the following, in their common acceptation, are generally placed before their nouns : autre, other. beau, fine. bon, good. brave {hiâhv), brave. cher, dear. méchant {jnay-shâng), wicked. mauvais {rnô-véh), bad. meilleur {inë-yeûr), better. moindre {mo-aing-dr), less. nouveau {noù vôh), new. . demi {dé-méê), half, grand, great, gros, large, jeune, young, joli, pretty, petit {p'-têê), small, saint {saing), holy, tout {toîi), ail. vieux (vyeu), old. vrai {vray), true. 212 Many of these, however, may be constantly found in French books placed after^ and many of the others may be found before their nouns. The safe rule is to place the adjective after its noun. The foUovring adjectives have a different meaning, according as they stand before or after their noun: Mon cher ami, my dear friend (denoting affection), un brave homme, an honest man. un onnête homme, an honest man. une fausse clef, a false key, skel- eton-key, a picklock. una jo^'^^-femme, a midwife. la dernière année, the last year (of certain space of time).' Un livre cher, a dear book (de- noting the price). un homme brave, a brave (= cour- ageous) man. un homme honnête, a civil or po- lite man. une clei fausse, a wrong key. une femme sage, a wise woman, l'année dernière, last year (the past year). Degrees of Comparison. The Comparative is formed by placing the adverb plus^ more, before the adjective, while le plus or la plus (fern. ) is prefixed to denote the Superlative. Positive. Comparative, plus haut ) j- higher. haut {ôh), {m.) K . , haute {ôkt) (/.) S ^^ ' belle {be'l), (/.) :) s beautiful. plus haute plus beau plus belle beautiful. i) For instance : He spent the last year of his life at Paris, il passa la dernière année de sa vie à Paris. 213 Superlative, le plus haut \ the highest, la plus haute le plus beau 1^ the most beautiful, la plus belle \ the hi t There is in French also a lower and lowest degree which is formed by the words moins^ less, for the Compa- rative, and le {là) moins, the least, for the Superlative. Positive. Comparative. cher (w.) ) moins cher ) less dear, /.^., \ dear. \ chère (/.) ) moins chère \ cheaper. Superlative. le moins cher ] > the least dear, i.e., the cheapest, la moins chère ) The following three adjectives have an Irregular Comparison • Bon,/, bonne, good ; comp. meilleur, e, better; super, le meilleur, la meilleure, the best. Mauvais, e, {môh-vay), in the meaning wicked ; comp. pire {péêr\ worse ; sup. le pire, /. la pire, the worst. Petit, e ; comp. moindre {mo-aing-dr), less ; sup. le moindre, /. la moindre, the least. Remarks : As before an adjective is rendered by aussi ; as after it, and than are both translated by que. Ex. : II est aussi bon que moi, he is as good as I am. Elle est plus belle que sa cousine, she is handsomer than her cousin. 214 TABLE Nouns and Adjectives. Nouns. Masc. Fern. Apostr. Plural. N. le la \ les G. du de la de r des D. au à la à r aux A. le la r les Plural of Nouns. Irregular Plural. maison, maisons. ciel, cieux. fils, fils. l'oeil, yeux. tableau, tableaux. aïeul, aïeux. cheval, chevaux. Adjecti ves. grand, grande ; grands, grandes. bon, bonne ; bons, bonnes. neuf, neuve ; neufs, neuves. heureux, heureuse ; heureux, heureuses blanc, blanche ; blancs, blanches. public, publique ; publics, publiques. vieux, vieille ; vieux, vieilles. doux, douce ; doux, douces. long, longue ; longfs, longues. Irregular Comparison. bon ; meilleur ; le meilleur, mauvais ; pirs ; le pire, petit ; moindre ; le moindre. sa 215 Pronouns. Conjunctive Personal. | je, me tu, te, il, lui, le. elle, lui, la. nous, nous, vous, vous, ils, leur, les. elles, leur, les. Disjunctive Personal. moi, toi, lui, elle, nous, vous, eux, elles. Possessive Pron.: (Adject.) mon, ma, mes. notre, nos. ton, ta, tes. votre, vos. son, sa, ses. leur, leurs. Possessive Pronouns (Substant.) le mien, la mienne le tien,* la tienne ; le sien, la sienne ; le nôtre, la nôtre ; le vôtre, la vôtre ; le leur, la leur ; les miens, les miennes, les tiens, les tiennes, les siens, les siennes, les nôtres. "1 les vôtres. V both genders. les leurs. J Demonstrative Pronouns. ce, cet, cette ; celui, celle ; celui-ci, celle-ci ; celui-là, celle-là ; ces. ceux, celles, ceux-ci, celles-d. ceux-là, celles-là. Relative Pronouns. qui ; que. lequel, laquelle ; lesquels, lesquelles. dont ; en ; y. 216 Conjugaison du verbe ÊTRE. Premier mode. FUTUR. INDICATIF. Je serai. tu seras. PRÉSENT. il sera, Je suis, nous serons. tu es, vous serez. il est. ils seront. nous sommes, FUTUR ANTÉRIEUR. vous êtes. ils sont. J'aurai été, tu auras été, IMPARFAIT. il aura été, J'étais, tu étais, nous aurons été. vous aurez été. il était, ils auront été. nous étions, Deuxième mode. vous étiez. ils étaient. CONDITIONNEL PASSÉ DÉFINI. PRÉSENT. Je fus. Je serais, tu fus. tu serais, il fut, il serait, nous fûmes. nous serions, vous fûtes. vous seriez, ils furent. ils seraient. PASSÉ INDÉFINI. PASSÉ {ire forme). J'ai été. J'aurais été, tu as été, tu aurais été. il a été, il aurait été. nous avons été, nous aurions été, vous avez été, vous auriez été, ils ont été. ils auraient été. PASSÉ ANTÉRIEUR. PASSÉ (2 tne forme). J'eus été. J'eusse été, tu eus été. tu eusses éié. il eut été. il eût été, nous eûmes été, nous eussions été. vous eûtes été. vous eussiez été. ils eurent été. ils eussent été. PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. Troisième mode. J'avais été, IMPERATIF. "tu avais été. il avait été, PRÉSENT OU FUTUR. nous avions été, Sois, vous aviez été, soyons. ils avaient été. soyez. Quatrième mode. SUBJONCTIF. PRÉSENT OU FUTUR. Que je sois, que tu sois, qu'il soit, que nous soyons, que vous soyez, qu'ils soient. IMPARFAIT. Que je fusse, que tu fusses, qu'il fût, que nous fussions, que vous fussiez, qu'ils fussent. PASSÉ. Que j'aie été, que tu aies été, qu'il ait été, que nous ayons été, que vous ayez été. qu'ils aient été. PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. Que j'eusse été, que tu eusses été, qu'il eût été, que nous eussions été^ que vous eussiez été, qu'ils eussent été. Cinquième mode. INFINITIF. PRÉSENT. Ci. Etre. PASSÉ. Avoir été. PARTICIPE PRÉSENT. Etant. PARTICIPE PASSÉ, Eté. 217 Conjugaison du verbe AVOIR. Premier mode. INDICATIF. PRÉSENT. J'ai, tu as, il a, nous avons, vous avez, ils ont. IMPARFAIT. J'a'vais, tu avais, il avait, nous, avions, vous aviez, ils avaient. PASSÉ DÉFINI. J'eus, tu eus, il eut, nous eûmes, vous eûtes, ils eurent. PASSÉ INDÉFINI. J'ai eu, tu as eu, il a eu, nous avons eu, vous avez eu, ils ont eu. PASSÉ ANTÉRIEUR. J'eus eu, tu eus eu, il eut eu, nous eûmes eu, vous eûtes eu, ils eurent eu. PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. J'avais eu, tu avais eu, il avait eu, nous avions eu, vous aviez eu, ils avaient eu. FUTUR. J'aurai, tu auras, il aura, nous aurons, vous aurez, ils auront. FUTUR ANTÉRIEUR. J'aurai eu, tu auras eu, il aura eu, nous aurons eu, vous aurez eu, ils auront eu. Deuxième mode. CONDITIONNEL. J'aurais, tu aurais, il aurait, nous aurions, vous auriez, ils auraient. PASSÉ {\re forme). J'aurais eu, tu aurais eu, il aurait eu, nous aurions eu, vous auriez en, ils auraient eu. PASSÉ {2me forme). J'eusse eu, tu eusses eu, il eût eu, nous eussions eu, vous eussiez eu, ils eussent eu. Tn mode. IMPERATIF. PRÉSENT OU FUTUR. Aye, Ayons, Ayez. Quatrihne mode. SUBJONCTIF. PRÉSENT OU FUTUR. Que j'aie, que tu aies, qu'il ait, que nous ayons, que vous ayez, qu'ils aient. IMPARFAIT. Que j'eusse, que tu eusses, qu'il eût, que nous eussions, que vous eussiez, qu'ils eussent. PASSÉ. Que j'aie eu, que tu aies eu, qu'il ait eu, que nous ayons eu, que vous ayez eu, qu'ils aient eu. PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. que j'eusse eu, que tu eusses eu, qu'il eût eu, q«e nous eussions eu, que vous eussiez eu, qu'ils eussent eu. Cinquième mode. INFINITIF. PRÉSENT. Avoir. PASSÉ. Avoir eu. PARTICIPE PRÉSENT. Ayant. PARTICIPE PASSÉ. Eu, ayant eu. 21S Première Conjugaison, en ER. INDICATIF. Je chant*?, tu chant^j-, il chantd', nous chant^wj, vous chantez, ils chant*?;//. IMPARFAIT. Je chantrt;/j, tu chantc, ils chant^r«/. PASSÉ {ire /orme). J'aurais chant/, tu aurais chant/, il aurait chant/, nous aurions chant/, vous auriez chant/, ils auraient chant/. PASSÉ {2me /orme). SUBJONCTIF. PRÉSENT OU FUTU R. Que je chant(7«j, qu'il finisse, nous unissons, vous finz>^2, que nous finissions. vous finissez. ils uniront. que vous finissiez. ils ûnisseni. FUTUR ANTÉRIEUR. qu'ils finissent. IMPARFAIT. J'aurai fin?, IMPARFAIT. Je finissais. tu auras fini. Que je fin?>j-^, tu unissais. il aura fini. que tu unisses, il finissais, nous aurons fin?. qu'il fin?/, nous finissions, vous aurez finz, que nous finissions. vous finzj-JzVz, ils auront fini. que vous finissiez. ils ^nissaienL qu'ils finissent. PASSÉ DÉFINI. CONDITIONNEL. PASSÉ. Je finis, tu finzj, PRÉSENT. Que j'aie fin?. il fin?/, Je finirais, que tu aies fin?, nous finîmes, <, tu finirais. qu'il ait fin?, vous finL'^j, ,il finirait. que nous ayons fin?. ils finirent. nous finirions. que vous ayez fin?. vous finmVz, qu'ils aient fin?. PASSÉ INDÉFINI. ils uniraient. J'ai fini, tu as fin?, PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT. PASSÉ, {ire forme). Que j'eusse fin?. il a fini, J'aurais fin?, que tu eusses fin?', nous avons finz, tu aurais fin?. qu'il eût fin?', vous avez fini, il aurait fin?. que nous eussions fin?' ils ont fin?. nous aurions fin?, que vous eussiez fin?, PASSÉ ANTÉRIEUR. vous auriez fin?, ils auraient fin?. qu'ils eussent fin?. J'eus fin?, tu eus fini. PASSÉ {2me forme). INFINITIF. il eût fini J'eusse fin?, tu eusses fin?, il eût fin?, nous eussions fin?. PRÉSENT. nous eûmes fine, vous eûtes fini, ils eurent fin?. Fin?n PASSÉ. PLUS QUE-PARFAIT. vous eussiez fin?, ils eussent fin?. Avoir fin?*. J'avais fini, ^ PARTICIPE PRÉSENT. tu avais fini, il avait fin?, IMPERATIF. Finissant. nous avions fine, Fin?V, vous aviez fini, finissons, PARTICIPE PASSÉ. ils avaient finz. unissez. Fin?, fin?V, ayant fin?'. 220 INDICATIF. PRÉSENT. Je rendj-, tu rendj-, il rend, nous rendons, vous rendez, ils rend^«/. IMPARFAIT. Je rendais, tu rendais, il xendaïf, nous rendions, vous rendïVs, ils rendaient. PASSÉ DÉFINI. Je rendz'j, tu rendis, il rend//, nous rend/w;;/. PASSÉ {ire /orme). J'aurais rend«, tu aurais rendu, il aurait rendu, nous aurions rendw, vous auriez rendu, ils auraient rendw, PASSÉ {2me forme). J'eusse rendw, tu eusses rendw, il eût rendw. nous eussions rendw, vous eussiez rendw, ils eussent rendw. IMPERATIF. SUBJONCTIF. PRÉSENT OU FUTUR. Que je rend^ que tu rendes, qu'il rendif, que nous rendions^ que vous rendiez qu'ils rendd *' " *' re (== rend-re). This table ought to be continually used by the stu- dent, who had better paste it on a stiff paper-board. INDICATIF. PRÉSENT. t conj. 2d conj. 'id conj e is s es is s e it - ons issons ons ez issez ez ent issent IMPARFAIT. ent ais issais ais ai s issais ais ait issait ait ions issions ions iez issiez iez aient issaient aient PASSÉ DÉFINI ai as a âmes âtes èrent erai eras era erons erez eront is is is is it it îmes îmes îtes îtes irent irent FUTUR. irai rai iras ras ira ra irons rons irez rez iront ront 222 CONDITIONNEL, présent. erais irais rais erais irais rais erait irait rait erions irions rions eriez iriez riez eraient iraient raient IMPERATIF. e 1 ^^ s ons 1 issons ons ez 1 issez ez SUBJONCTIF. PRÉSENT. e isse e es isses es e isse e ions issions ions iez issiez iez ent issent ent IMPARFAIT. asse isse isse asses isses isses ât ît ît assions issions issions assiez issiez issiez assent issent issent INFINITIF. PRÉSENT er 1 ir 1 ] =»ARTICIPE. PRÉSENT ant 1 issant L ant PASS É. é, ée. 1 i. ie. 1 u, ue. Translate the following Exercises into English, and then again, without assistance of the book, into French : 223 I. At Dinner. Auriez-vous ia bonté de faire là salade pendant que je vais (je vay = / am going) découper {carve) le rôti {roast). Prendrez-vous ( prâng-drëh vôu = will you lake) du rôti? Aimez-vous le gras (grâh ==/(2/) ? Don- nez-moi du maigre (maygr = Z^^/^), s'il vous plaît. J'es- père que vous trouvez ce morceau (môr-sôh ==_piece) à votre goût (goû). Vous n'avez pas de sauce. Comment trouvez-vous le rôti ? Permettez-moi de vous servir (sêr-vëër = to serve) un morceau de .... ? Vous n'avez pas mangé de ... . Desservez (day-sër-vëh = clear the things off) et apportez-nous du café. 2. A Business Letter. Paris, le treize (trayse=:i3th) janvier (jâng-v)'ëh ^=i January). Monsieur Charles Toussaint à Lyon (toû-saing âh Lêë-ong), Monsieur, Occupés (oc-cii-pay = busy^ occupied) du règlement (ray-glê-mâng = regulation) de nos écritures (ay-krëë- XMx = books), nous vous envoyons ci-inclus votre compte pour l'année passée {last year) ^ en vous priant (âng voû prëë-âng == requesting, begging) de vouloir bien le faire examiner, et si vous êtes d'accord {i7i accord^ accordance), avec nous, de nous créditer sur le nouveau (noû-vôh = ;2^7£/) compte du solde {balance) en notre faveur {favor) de dix mille francs. Agréez l'assurance ( â-gray-ëh lâ-sii-rângs = ^^r^/ the assurance) de la parfaite considération (pâr-faite cong-sëë- dié'X?i}cs.-^jovi^-= highest esteem) de Vos très-humbles {Q\\Ti^-\A = humble) serviteurs (sêr vëë-teûr = servants) , Gaillard & Cie. (gâ-yâr ay cong-pân-yëë). 3. i) Monsieur, je représente (re-pray-zârigt) la maison de B. et Compagnie (B. & Cie.) à Lyon (lëë-ong), et je viens vous faire mes offres de service. — 2) Ah, je m'en souviens (soû-vyaing =: remei7ibcr\ nous avons déjà fait des affaires ensemble (zâng-sâng-bl = together'). Mais je ne puis vous donner d'ordre aujourd'hui. — 3) J'en suis bien fâché {sorry). Je ne puis cependant (sê-pâng-dâng = however) vous quitter sans vous montrer quelques échantillons entièrement (ang-tyairemang^^/z/Z/r/)') nou- veaux (noû-vôh). — 4) Ne vous en donnez pas la peine (pain = trouble) ; je ne commanderai (order) rien {nothing) pour le moment. Ce n'est pas une peine du tout; je m'en ferai un plaisir. — 5) Si vous voulez bien prendre la peine ^ d'examiner (deg-zâh-mëë-nay) mes échantillons, je suis convaincu (cong-vaing-kii z=i convi?iced) que vous me don- nerez un ordre au moins pour essai (trial). — 6) Voyez, voici une nouvelle espèce {species) de mouseline de laine (moû-zê-lëën de laine) qui se porte {is worn) beaucoup en France. — 7) On la porte beaucoup pour robes d'été (summer -dresses)-^ nous en avons vendu l'impossible (laing- po-sëëbl). ■4. Comment trouvez-vous la nouvelle pièce de mon- sieur N..'* A parler franchement (frâng-shê-mâng=y"/-<7//it- />'), la pièce est ennuyeuse (ang-n'wee-yeûse=/cv//V?//j). La pièce manque (m~ink=^ is wanting in) d'action (dîlc-zyong = in action). Le dénoûment est forcé (le day-noû-mâng ay for-say = the catastrophe is forced). L'intrigue (laing- treeg = the plot) n'a pas le sens commun (le sang com- meûng = common sense). Comment avez-vous trouvé les 225 couplets du vaudeville {the couplets^ songs) ? Assez jolis {rather pretty) ; mais je ne suis pas enchanté (âng-shâng- tay = enchanted^ charmed ), ni (nee = neither) de vos chan- teurs (shâng-teûr == singers)^ ni de vos cantatrices, (câng- tâh-trees = lady-singers). Ils chantent (shângt = sing) presque tous faux (presk toû fôh =■ almost all false). Un théâtre de vaudeville ne peut pas être bien monté en chanteurs. Translate the following Exercises. 1. ^ i) May I ask you to tell me if Mr. Grevy is at home.?* 2) I am very sorry {je regrette bien)^ sir ; Mr. Grevy is not at home ; he has just gone out [sortir = sor-têër). — 3) May I ask you to tell me where you have bought this beautiful dress and how much you liave paid for it ? — 4) Be so kind to pass me the salt {le sel). — 5) Have the kindness to read this letter ; I do not understand {j'e ne comprends pas = je ne cong-prâng pâii) English. — 6) Have the kindness to give my card to Mr. Bronsard (brong-sâr) and tell him, if you please, that I have just arrived by {par) this train. — 79 If I were not, afraid of troubling you I would beg you to accompany me this morning. I have some shopping to do. — 8) Would you have the kindness to send me some patterns of the best Lyons silk you liaA'-e in stock ? — 9) Would you have the kindness to get me a physician .'' My sister is very ill {malade = mâ-lâhd). — 10) If it were convenient to you to give me some information {des renseignements = day râng-sên-yê-mâng) about {sur) Mr. Beauregard, I should feel ( = be) very much {t?ien) obliged {obligé = 226 ob-lëê-jay) to you. — ii) You would greatly oblige me if you would give (=^if you gave [Imperfect]) this letter to Mrs. Tourville. — 12) I did not understand you. Will you please repeat what you have said ? — 13) Would you be so kind as to grant me a moment's interview? I have just received a letter from my uhcle in Paris and hope that its contents will be quite satisfactory to you. — 14) You have greatly obliged me, sir, and you may count on my gratitude. — 15) Do me this favor. I beg for it {en). — 16) Be so kind as to write to Mr. B. that I want two front-rooms. 2. i) Tell the boy {garçon) that he must go to the sta- tion at half past five at the latest, as the train arrives at 4.40. — 2) The dressmaker {ia couturière = koû-tii-ryair) must finish my dress to-day as I am going to leave fû|| Saratoga to-night. — 3) At what o'clock must you be ar your physician's ? — 4) How much money do you need.' — 5) If the tailor should come \Imperfeit\ tell him that I have no time to try {essayer) the coat on this morning. He must call again {revenir) to-morrow at a quartier to twelve. — 6) Waiter, I have no knife. — Here is one, sir. 7) If you want good gloves, go to the French glove- maker's in Church street. He keeps (= has) excellent ones. —8) Mr. Littré must go to Rouen for some weeks. He Avants to visit {visiter) his aunt, who is very ill. — 9) Since when are 3'ou in Paris .' — Since last night. — 10) Well, I hope you wnll do me the favor to dine with me to-day, as I am obliged to go to England to-morrow morning at half past four. — 11) If you Avant to leave by this boat, you must hurry {vous dépêcher). — 12) If I were not afraid of troubling you I would beg you to hand {don- ner) this little package to my sister. But you must go there (y) at once, as she will stay {rester) only one day in Paris. COMPANION TO THE ^eviôed perôîon of the pc^2^ ^eôtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on the Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the Englisli Revision Committee, WITH SUPPLEMENT B¥ À MEXBEB OF THE IMESICAX COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revioion of the Work and Co-operation of the New Testament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official vi^eight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons whi^h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- »^ mittce, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Commiitee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. Th s cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighled, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, says of this book: *' Many persons have expressed a desire that, limultaneouily with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons ior such changes ÏIS will be found in ils pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire. ...Nowhere eise in print can be found a statement so full and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an imexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers. New York, , writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers would have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover ail the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would!t>e lo!>t. All this is srt forth by Dr. Rubens with admirable perspicuitv. Those who have a» y^ intelligent interest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this liitle book absorbingly interesting;. , I shall urge every men.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-clashCS." "So valuable, inteiesting and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obiaiu it immediately." — New York Observer. I'aper, 8vo size, S5 cents ; C loth, 16uio, 75 cents. ^*^, For Sale by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK& CO., PubSishers, IO& 12 Dey St., N.Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full. Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come lo consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent with accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will resemble the Bagster Bible, ♦• Fac simile large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices within the reach of all. Thi; "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, including the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de in the ** Bagster Bibles,'' with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be trinted in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King James version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully prepared helps to the study of the revised New Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted lo harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Popular Cloth Edition— Seady in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.60. Send for prospectus giving full description and prices of finer Bindings. I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, 10 and 12 Dey S^. NeW York. THE "^mkx^tli&p igîtetiv A SIMPLE ANU PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY "^uwtli mn\\n\h ^paubi anil fklmi BY DR. RICHARD S.- ROSENTHAL, Lafe Director of the ^^ Akademie fur fremde Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the ^" Meisterschaft College^'' in London, and Principal of the ^^ Meisterschaft School of Practical I, inguistry''^ in New York. FRENCH. L\ FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAlNINCi IHRIOE LESSON'S. PART VII L NEW YORK : I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AM) 12 Dey Street. TKRMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened âhc Heisiersckf-t ])chooI of ^radical Jinguijtrg FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. AH exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire lo study There are no extra charges. The price, Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise., and questions must be written on a sepa ate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter acfdressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, 10 and 12 Tifff Strrrt, Xftr York. ^\lè ^mi^nt{\û'^pi^m.. FRENCH FAUT nil. VIII. FOUNDATION SENTENCE. {Continuation^ I should be much obliged to you. 1. 1. I am very much {infiniment) obliged to you. 2. I am sorry, but I cannot do it. 3. Witli the best will (?« volonté) in the world {du monde)y I could not {je 7ie pourrais) do so (= it). 4. I should be much obliged to you, if you were to tell me how I could find the new (nouvelle) address of this gentleman. i) Je pourrai, / shall be able, is the irregular future of pouvoir, which is conjugated thus : Present. Imperfect. Je peux {peu), } I can, Je pouvais {poû-vay), I could, &c. Je puis, f &c. tu pouvais, tu peus {peil), il pouvait, il peut {peu), nous pouvions {poû-7yon(f), nous pouvons (/t>«-z/(?«o-), vous pouviez {poû-7N 242 Remarks. i) The numbers 21, 31, 41, 51, 61, and 71 are written vingt et un, trente et un, &c., but S: and 10 1 are written quatre-vingt-un, cent-un, without the copula et. 2) Quatre-vingts, 80, has a final s which is omitted in all subsequent numbers. 3) Deux cents, 200, trois cents, 300, &c,, are written with a final s; but when these numbers are followed by any other number they drop the sj as : deux cent un, 201, trois cent quatre, 304, &c. 4) Mille Jiever takes the s. 5) There being no modern French number to express 70 or 90 (the old forms septante and nonnanté being almost obsolete, and only used in Switzerland) one counts from 60 to 80, and from 80 to 99, continuously, as though one were to say in English, eighty-eight, eighty- nine, eighty-ten, eighty-eleven, &c. 6) The expression, / am 20, 30, 40, &c., years old, can- not be rendered literally, but must be expressed thus : /at vingt ans, — fai trente ans, &c. — How old are you? is translated: Quel âge avez-vous? Ex.: Quel âge a votre ami ? how old is your friend ? II a dix-huit ans, he is eighteen years old. Ordinal Numbers. Except le premier {Ic pre-mycH) and le second {le se- gong)^ the ordinal numbers are formed from the cardinal by changing e mute into ieme; and by adding this syllable 243 to those which end in another consonant. Among these, however, cinq takes u before ieme {cinquième)^ and neuf changes the / into v {neuvième). The ordinal numbers are as follows : Le premier {prë-viyêh) \ the la première (^prë-myair) ) first, le second {së-gong) '\ la seconde {së-gongd) \ ® le, la deuxième {lieû- I second. zyai/n) J le troisième (iroâ-zj'ë/i m) ihe third, le quatrième, the fourth, le cinquième (saing-kyëhni), the fifih. le sixième {sëê-zyëhm), the sixth, le septième, the seventh, le huitième, the eight, le neuvième, the ninth, le dixième, the loth. le onzième, the iith. le douzième, the i2ih. le treizième, the 13th. le quatorzième, the 14th. le quinzième, the 15th. le seizième, the i6th. le dix-septième, the 17th. le dix-huitième, the i8th. le dix-neuvième, the 19th. le vingtième, the 20th. le vingt-unième, the 21st. le vingt-deuxième, the 22d, &c. le trentième, the 30th. le quarantième, the 40th. le cinquantième, the 5cth. le soixantième, the 6oth. le soixante-dixième, the 70th. le soixante-onzième, the 71st. le soixante-douzième, the 72d, &c. le quatre-vingtième, the 8otb. le quatre-vingt-unième, the 8ist. le quatre-vingt-dixième, the 90th. le centième, the looih. le cent et unième, the loist. le cent deuxième, the io2d, &c. le cent vingtième, the 120th. le deux-centième, the 200th. le six cent soixante-quinzième, the 675th. le millième, the loooth. le dernier, the last. Remarks. i) Unième is used only after vingt ^ trente^ quarante, &c.,as: Charles est le trente-unième de sa classe, Charles ^is the 31st of his class. ^ 244 2) Days of tne month (except le premier and le der- nier^ are expressed by cardinal numbers, as : The first of April, le premier avril ; but : The fifth of January, le cinq \zxiw\ç,x {jàng-vyêK). The 2d, 3d, 4ih, &c. of May, le deux, trois, quatre, &c., mai {or de mai). The eleventh of March, le onze (without apostrophe) mars. The twentieth of June, le vingt juin {fwôaing). The question, ' What day of the month is to-day ? ' is translated : Quel jour du mois avons-nous aujourd'hui? or : Quel quantième {kill kângt-yêhm) sommes-nous? (or avons nous]) ? Answer : C'est aujourd'hui le dix, or : Nous sommes le dix, or nous'^'avons le dix. The English ' on the sixth,' &c., is rendered in French le six. Ex.: On the sixth of May, le six mai {may). 3) Proper names of princes, too, take in French the cardinal numbers without the article, except the first and sometimes the second., as : Henri premier, Henri the first. Charles second or deux, Charles the second ; but Henry quatre, Henry the fourth. 4) The distinctive numbers (adverbs of number) are formed from the ordinal by adding -nunt or -ement to the final letter : Premièrement {pré-myêh-ré-mâng), first ; in the first place. Deuxièmement {deû-zyêh-mé-mâng), secondly. Troisièmement {iroâ-zyêh-më-fnâng), thirdly, &c. 5) Fractioîial numbers are expressed by ordinal num- bers, as in English, but only from five upwards, as : Un cinquième, a fifth. Un huitième, an eighth. Un sixième, a sixth. Un dixième, a tenth. 245 The others are as follows: A half = un demi {dë-mée), f . une demie. The half = la moitié {mô-à-tyéK). A third = un tiers. A quarter or fourth = un quart {kâr). One pound and a half = une livre et demie {de niêê). Names of the months. janvier {Jâng-vyëk), January, février {fay-vrëé-ëfi), February, mars {mars), March, avril {à-vrëë-yë\ April, mai {may), May. juin {fuâing), June, juillet {fwëë-yëh), July, août, {a- ou), August. septembre {set-iàng-br), Septem- ber. octobre {oct-to-br), October. novembre {no-vâng-br) , No- vember. décembre {day-sâng-br), Decem- ber. en janvier, in January. Names of the days. dimanche {dëë-mângsh), Sunday, lundi {leûng-dëë), Monday, mardi {màr-dêë), Tuesday, mercredi {mër-kr-dëë), Wednes- day. jeudi {Jeû-dëë), Thursday, vendredi {vàng-dr-dcë), Friday, samedi {sâm-dëë), Saturday, on Tuesday, (le) mardi. Words Les Meubles (meû-bl), (m, une armoire {âr-m^woâr), a ward robe, la commode, the bureau, le tiroir {tëë-ro-àr), the drawer, la table, the table, la chaise {shayzé), the chair, le fauteuil {fôh-teû-yë), the ar'm chair. The Furniture, la couverture {coû-vër-tûr), the blanket. une étagère {oy-tâh-jayr), a what- not. le tapis {tâh-pëë), the carpet. le tapis de table, the table-cover. le lit {lêë), the bed. le lit de fer, the iron bedstead.. 246 le dos {dôh), the back. le traversin {trâ-vèr-saing), the le sofa, the sofa. bolster. la glace (ç-/«/w), the (large) mir- le matelas {tnà-f-lâh), the mat- ror. tress. le miroir {mêê-ro-âr), the (small) "vun sommier élastique (i-o;7z-jM ay- mirror, lâ-stêék), a spring-maitress. le tableau (/â-/^/^), the picture. Vor€\\\er {lôh-rë -y é h), the pillow. le cadre {câh-dr), the frame. le drap {drâh), the sheet. la cheminée {shé-mèê-tiay), the faire le lit, to make ihe bed. chimney. mettre des draps blancs, to put le chambranle (shâng-brângl), the on fresh sheets. chimney-piece. une lampe {lângp), a lamp. une pelle {pell), a shovel. des allumettes {day zà-lii met), des pincettes {paing-sët), tongs. matches. une pendule {pâng-dul\ a clock, une bougie {boûjêê), a waxlight. Translate the following Exercise into English and then render it again into French : Appartements à louer {tip-pâr fc-mâtig àh loti ë/i). Avez-voiis des^appartements (dây zfip-pâr-t'mâng) à louer .^ — J'en'^ai plusieurs et de 'différents prix (dif-fay- râng prëë). — Voulez-vous un appartement meublé ou non- meublé .^-rj'ai besoin de chambres meublées. Il me faudrait un salon et deux chambres à coucher. — Je puis vous satisfaire {saiisfy), madame. — Donnez- vous la peine d'entrer (dâng-tray). Je vais vous faire voir {let you see ; show y oil) les chambres. — L'escalier (les-kâ-lyeh = the stair-case) est^un peu rapide (râ-pëëd = steep). — Il en a l'air, mais^il est tiès-doux (doi~i = rdrjv) à monter. — Est- 247 il éclairé {lighted up) le soir? — Cela va sans dire ( Wh}\ certainly j of course). — Vous voyez que le salon est sur le devant (dê-vâng = to the front) et que les chambres à coucher sont sur le derrière. — Quel est le prix du loyer {rent) ? — Il est de cent francs. — C'est très-cher. — Veuil- lez remarquer, madame, que c'est ici le plus beau quar- tier (kâr-tyêh z=z part j quarter) de la ville et que la mai- son est très-bien habitée (â-bëë-tay = inhabited by very respectable people) . In order to get a thorough mastery over the Frencli verbs the student may now place the following verb's in proper form. Exercise, Give the Indicative Present of the following verbs : Je mener. — Nous avancer. — Il acheter, — Vous appeler. — Trop de plaisir ennuyer. — Q^s élèves re'péter comme des perroquets (per-ro- Icëh = parrots). — L'intempérance (laing-tâng-pay-rângs = intemper- ance) abréger {shorten) la vie (vëë = life). — La nature (nS-tur) est un miroir fidèle {\êë-à2iy\ = true) qui refléter {repeat) à nos yeux la grand- eur de Dieu {gràng-deûr de dyeû = tliQ greatness of God). Imperfect. Je commencer. — Nous régner {to reign). — Il Jeter. — L'armée avan- cer, les'^ennemis (lay zë-në-mêë) engager le feu ; la victoire (vïc-t'woâre = victory) balancer: — Nous établir. — Vous rougir {to blush). — Ils bâtir (ii? 3«i'/ la douceur à la modestie. — Il dé- f£tidre. — Nous correspondre. 248 Future. ^ous avoîier. — Est-ce toi qui distribuer? — Je Y aimer. — Dieu nous protéger. — Vous regretter\e temps perdu {lost). — Vous saisir {to seize). — Le travail {iTsi-vSi-yé = iaùor) vous enricAir {âLng-rë6-shêër=to enric/i). — Nous répondre. — Vous perdre. Conditional. Nous perdre. — Tu ente/idre {3.ng-l3Lng-dr = to /lear). — Sans la vertu {virtue) vous prétendre vainement (vain'-mâng = in vain) au bonheur (bon-neûr = happiness). — V ous prier. — Nous dîner. Suhju7ïctive Present. Il faut que vousr^r/zyfcv- (cër-tëë-fyêh. — Il faut que chacun (shâh- kefing = every one) payer son tribut à la nature (nâ-tiir). — Il faut qu'il abréger. — Il faut qu'il envoyer les échantillons. Put the following singulars into the corresponding persons of the plural : ]e prétends. — Tu as défendu. — J'avais rompu. — ]e perdrais si je jouais, mais je ne Joue pas. — Ton maître ne veut pas que tu V inter- rompes. — Je hais. —Que je vienne. — Je vais. — Il ira. — ]e faiblissais. — \\ plaisante. — Il assure, — Tu as donné. — Je suis venu. — Elle était /ar/ï*. — Il/^«/. — ]e pourrai. — Je suis allé. Translate the following Exercises into English, and then again, without assistance of the book, into French : 249 At a theatre. Où voulez-vous que nous'^allions^aujourd'hui?— Al- lons^aux Français.^ — Je le veux bien. — Qu'est-ce qu'on donne ce soir? Voyons l'affiche (lâ-feesh = hand-bill., postEr), Les Fourchamhault [the Fourchambault [foûr- shâng-bol] family)^ comédie (cô-may-dëë) en cinq actes par {by) Emile Augier. Le nom de l'auteur (lô-teûr = the author) suffit (is sufficient) pour me décider (day-see- day = to decide). J'entends dire (jâng-tâng dëër = / hear it said, I am told) que c^est^une très-belle pièce {very good \^finê\ piece). Quelle place prendrons-nous (prâng- drong noû = shall we take) ? Quelles sont les meilleures {the best) places? Pour les^^hommes {gentlemen) les fau- teuils d'orchestre (fô-teû-yë dor-shès-tr =orchestra-stalls) ; mais les dames ne vont qu'aux premières ou aux secondes loges {go only to the boxes on the first or secod tier). " V entr'- acte (lâng-tr-âct) messieurs, le programme détaillé (day- tâ-yay = detailed) du spectacle! Les noms (nông = names) de tous les acteurs {actors) qui jouent (jew = pl(iy) dans les pièces de ce soir {^'vjq2,x^ evening) ! " — Qu'est-ce qu'ils crient (krëë ■=■ scream) donc ces^individues (say- zaing-dëë-vëë-dii := these individuals) ? — Ils^offrent (eel- zôffr = they are offering) les petits journaux de théâtre (lay-p'tee joûr-nô = the small journals). — A Paris, ces journaux remplacent (râng-plâs = take the place of) le programme qui est distribué (dïs-tree-bii-ay = distributed) en Amérique par l'administration (lâd-mëë-nïs-trâ-zyong = administratioti) du théâtre (tay-âh-tr). — Combien ce journal ? Vingt centimes (sâng-tëëm). i) The best French theatre in Paris, or rather in France. 250 Words. La Ville (vëël). Une rue pavée {pâh-vay), a paved street, traverser, to cross, passer de l'autre côté, to cross over ; to go to the other side, le trottoir [trot-i' ivoâr), the foot- path, le coin {ko-aing) de rue, the street corner, au bout de la rue {oh boûdê là rii), at the end of the street. tout droit {ton drodh), straight ahead ! l'ambassade {lânghâs-sàhd\ the embassy, la police (/^-/tvj-), the police, un sergent de ville [ser-jàng de vêêl), a police-officer, le gaz, the gas. un réverbère, a street-lamp, une voiture {voâh-tur), a carriage. une voiture '\ de remise, ( Hvery- coach ; fly un remise, f hackney-coach. (j'ëniêéze) ) le pont {pong), the bridge. The Town. la deuxième à droite {daï-zyihm), second turning to the right. ^ un passage {pâh sâge).a. thorough- - ■ fare. une place (p/â/is), '\ un square (pro- f nounced in the C ^ ^"i""^'^' English way), ; l'édifice {lay-dêé-fêês), the build- ing. un monument {moh-nû-mâng), a monument, une église {ay-glêëze), a church, un palais {pâh-lay), a palace. . l'hôtel de ville, the Town-hall ; Ciiy-hall. le cocher {kôh-sho}), the cabman, une course, a tour ; drive. à l'heure, by the hour. • à la course, by the mile. ' le pourboire {poûr-b'^voâr), a tip. une station de fiacres {fin stâ- -- syong de fêë-âkr), a cab-stand. — ^ un omnibus (/^/ïj), an omnibus, l'intérieur est complet {îaing-tayr- yeûr ay cong-play), full inside. COMPANION TO THE ^eViôcd pcfôîon oî the pcW ^côtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on tho Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the Englisii Revision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BY À MEMDEIl OF THE A3IEKICAX COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief His'ory of the Révision of the Work and Co-operation of the New T estament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an h.xplanation of the Appendix to the Revised i\ew Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passsges in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons whi-h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Ccmmiitee, in t.heir final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents jn paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, says of this book: •• Many persons have expressed a desire that, iiniu:taneou>.ly with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons lor such changes as will be found in ils pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted 10 meet this desire Nowhrre else in print can be found a statement so lull and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers. New York, writes: "The Companion to tne Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers won d have a wearisome work in ^ecklng to dis- cover a:l the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lost. All this iss t forth 1 y Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have ary intelligentinterest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this liitle book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every men.ber of the church of which! am pastor to give it a careful reading;, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-clas.scs." "So valuable, inteiesting and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to k.iow the why and wherefore of the revision, to obcai.i it immediately." — Aea/ York Observer. Taper, 8vo size, 25 cent< ; Clof li, 16ino, 75 cents. ^^ For Sa'e by Coo^scllcrs and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K.FUNK & CO., Publishers, I0& 12 Dey St.. N.Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full, Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other Ne^v and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come lo consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent wiih accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will resemble the Bagster Bible, " Fac simile large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices within the reach of all. Thiî "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, itcludin^ the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the mar<,in of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de in the " Dagster Bibles,'' with numerouî others, so far as appropriate, will be printed in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops c»f pages of the King Jimes version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully prepared helps to the study of the revised Nfav Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers* Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted lo harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Popdar Cloth Editi:n— Esaiy in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.60. Send for prospectus giving full description and prices of fintr Bindings. I.K. FUNK&CO., Publishers, 10 and 12 Dey St., New York. 259 39» Ah, tous ces^objets sont^usagés {toû say zob-jay song Hi- zâ-j'ay). 40. Conducteur {kong-duc-teûr\ deux places pour Lyon [plâhs pour léé-ong), s'il vous plaît. 41. Il n'y en^a plus dans ces waggons ('t'), a sheet. une enveloppe {âng-vë-lop\ an envelope. le bureau télégraphique (Jay-lay- grâ-fêêk), the telegraph-office. le télégramme, the telegram. une dépêche {day-f>oysh), a dis- patch. télégraphier {tay-lay-grâ-fyëk), to dispatch. lecâblp. the cable COMPANION TO THE ^eViôed pcrdion of the ^eW ^eôtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on tho Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Eevision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT LY A MEHBEB OF THE AMERICAN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief His'^ory of the Revjpion of the Work and Co-operation of the New 1 estament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, ' Being a Key to Passsges in Which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows v^hat changes have been made, and also the reasons whi:h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of ^.Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full. Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come to consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of formej: Teachers' and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent wiih accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- knoMjn Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will resemble the Bagster Bible, " Facsimile large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices ivifhin the reach of all. Thi> "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, including the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the. passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de in the " Bagster Bibles,'' with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be printed in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King James version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each v: je to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully lared helps to the study of the revised New Testament, gleaned • iOm the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied ' Dm various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize ith the Revised Version. We shall introduce niiany other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever i>sued. Popular Cloth Edition— Ready in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.60. Send for prospectus giving full description and prices of finer Bhidings. I.K. FUNK&CO., Publishars, lOand 12 Dey St., Naw York. THE ^t$tet$cl|îtp $8^t^tt|. A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, N \Bl.iNG ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY "^tmli mn\\m, $iîatti$i and fïiûmu BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Laff Director of the ^^ Akademie fiir fremde Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the ''^ Meisterschaft College'''' in London^ and Principal of the '•^ Meisterschaft School of Practical Linguistry''^ in New York. FRENCH. LV FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS.' PART X. NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and "he has opened âhe ||^ister|ck|it |)cI|ool of ^radical |ingiuéirg FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly whicli langu.nge, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise^ and questions mui;t be written on a separate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO., 10 and 13 T>ey Street, Xrtr York. \l^ ^m^t^\é\=M^if^n\, FRENCH PART X. X. {Continuation?) FOUNDATION SENTENCE. (^No. VI.) 1. Of Dress and Dressing. 1. Hasten to dress yourself {de vous haliller). 2. 1 shall not be long in dressing {m'liahiUer). 3. What! you are not yet dressed? It is a quarter to ten. 4. I was very tired ( fatigué) this morning. 5. I got up {or I rose —je me suis levé) late; I shall soon {hientot) be ready. 6.* Give me my shirt, stockings, garters, shoes, and trousers. 7. Wash {lavezvous) your (= the) hands and face {h visage). 8. My hands are very dirty {sales). 9. Why did you not wash your hands } 10. Wipe {essugez) vour hands with this towel {cette ser- viette). X. {Continuation.^ FOUNDATION SENTENCE. {.No. VI.) 1. De l'habillement {de lâ-béê-yë-mdng). 1. Dépêchez- vous de vous^'habiller {day-pay-shay veU de voû-zâ-béê-yëJi). 2. Je ne serai pas longtemps à m'habiller {àh fud-bêë- yëJi). 3. Comment! vous n'êtes pas^encore habillé? Il est dix heures moins'^un (\\\2J^X. \déë-zeûr 7no-aing zeûng kâr). 4. J'étais bien fatigué {fà-tëë-gay) ce matin. 5. Je me suis levé tard {tàr) ; je vais^être bientôt prêt {je vay zay-tr byaing-tôh pray). 6. Donnez-moi ma chemise, mes bas, mes jarretières," mes souliers et mon pantalon {^niay bâ/i, may jà-rë-tyair^ may soû-lyëh ay mong pàng-tà-long). 7. Lavez-vous les mains et le visage {lay maing ay le vëë- zâjé) . S. Mes mains sont très-sales {may 7naing song tray sâ/il). 9. Pourquoi ne vous^êtes-vous pas lavé les mains {ne voil zayt voû pâh lâ-vay lay maing) ? 10. Essuyez vos mains avec cette serviette {ës-swëë-yëh voh maing â-vèk set ser-vyëi). 2V8 11. Clean [décrottez) my boots and brush my clothes, please. 12. Did you black {ciré) my shoes? 13. Have this coat mended (raccommoder). 14. Send me a tailor who understands (se charge de) re- pairing (reparations) ; there are some buttons off (= it wants some buttons, il manque quelques lou- ions à) this waistcoat. 15. This waistcoat is torn (déchiré). 16. There! I have torn my dress! 17. Oh, that's only a slight tear (nn petit accroc) ; I am going to put a stitch (faire n?i poitif) into it. 18. Tliat will not be seen. 19. Put OQ (mettez) this dress. 20. Wait (attendez) a moment; I have only to put on my necktie. 21. Put on your hat (or bonnet). 22. I am putting (je inets) my stockings on. 23. She dresses herself (elle se met) with a qreat deal of taste. 24. Take off (otcz) your hat (or bonnet). 25. Button up (boutonnez) your dress. 26. A buttonhole (une boutonnière) of this waistcoat is torn out (défaite). 27. This dress (or coat) is very becoming lo you. 279 11. Décrottez mes bottes et brossez mes^habits, s'il vous plaît [may zà-béë). 12. Avez-voiis ciré* mes souliers [sëë-ray may soû-lyëh) ? 13. Faites raccommoder cet^habit [se tà-bëë). 14. Envoyez-moi donc un tailleur qui se charge de répa- rations; il manque quelques boutons à ce gilet {dng- voâh-yëh mwoàh dong eûng tà-yeûr këë se shârje de 7'ay-pâ-râ-syong ; ëël mànk kèl ke boU-tong àh se jëë- lay). 15. Ce gilet est déchiré {day-shëë-ray). 16. Voilà que je déchire ma robe {kë je day-shëër nid robe). 17. Ce n'est qu'un petit^accroc ; je vais vous^y faire un point {se ?iay keûng p'tëë ià-kroc,Jé vay voû zëë fair eûng po-aing). 18. Ça ne se verra pas {sa ne se ver-rà pâh [verra is the irregular future of 7mr, to see]. 19. Mettez cef^habit {se tâ-bëë). 20. Attendez'^un moment {àt-tàng-day zeûng mô-màng) ; je n'ai plus que ma cravate à mettre. 21. Mettez votre chapeau {vôt shà-pôJi). 22. Je mets mes bas {je may may bàh), [Je mets is the ir- regular present of 7nettre^. 23. Elle se metjivec beaucoup de goût {ell se may tà-vëk bàh-koil de goû). 24. Otez votre chapeau. 25. Boutonnez votreHiabit {vôt rd-bëë). 26. Une boutonnière de ce gilet est défaite {boûtôn-nyair dé se jëë -lay ay day -fait). 27. Cet^habit vous va fort bien {jjoù vâh fôr* byaing) . 280 28. Which shoemaker works for you (vous chausse or hotte) at present (à present) ? 29. These boots are too tight for me (= press me, me gê- nent or serrent), 30. Will you try tliese boots? 31. I cannot put {or get) them on. 32. Stretch your leg out {allongez votre jambe), please. 33. All right; now put your foot on the ground {jxtr terre). 34. They are too tight on the instep {du coude-pied), ;^^. You know {vous savez) the first time one tries on (o?i met) a pair of boots, the foot feels always a little tight {on a toujours U pied un peu gene). i,6. Yes, but they squeeze me {elles me serrent) too hard ; I cannoL walk with ihem {marcher avec). I prefer {j'aime mieux) you to make me another pair. [After aimer mieux the Subjunctive has to follow.] 38. Undress yourself. 39. Take off your dress {or coat). 40. I must take off my dress. 41. Undress (déshabillez) this child. 42. You are not yet half (a moitié) undressed. 43. Hasten to undress yourself. 4f. He is taking his boots off. 45. I sliall not be long undressing. 281 Quel cordonnier vous chausse à présent (kël côr-don- nyêh voU shôss àh pray-zâ7ig) ? Quel bottier vous botte maintenant {maing-tè-nâng) ? 29. Ces bottes me gênent i^jane ox serrent \sêr'\) beaucoup. 30. Voulez-vous^essayer ces bottines {ze-say-yëh say bôt- têêii) ? 31. Je ne peux pas les mettre. 32. Allongez votre jambe {â-long-jay vôt jà7ig), s'il vous plaît. 7,2,. Bien, mettez le pied (pyêh) par terre à présent. 34. Elles me gênent (Jane) du coude-pied [coûd-pyëJi), 35. La première fois qu'on met des bottes, comme vous savez, on^a toujours le pied un peu gêné {le pyêh eûng peu Jay-fia}). 36. Oui, mais^elles me serrent trop {sèr trôh)^ je ne peux pas marcher avec {màr-shay à-vek). 37. J'aime mieux (m'yeû) que vous m'en fassiez (mâng fâs-yëh) une^autre paire. 38. Déshabillez-vous {day-zà-bëê-yëh vou). 39. Otez votre^habit. 40. Il faut que j'ôte mon'~^habit {ëël fô kê jôht mon nà- bëë), 41. Déshabillez cet^enfant {day-zà-bëë-yëh se tàng-fàng), 42. Vous n'êtes pas'^encore à moitié déshabillé {àh m'woà- tyëh day-zà-bëë-yëh). 43. Dépêchez-vous (or Hâtez-vous) de vous déshabiller. ( Il tire {or II ôte) ses bottes {ëël tëër [ôht] say bot). '^^' \ Il se débotte. 45. Je ne serai pas longtemps à me déshabiller. 282 2. 46. Have you (got) a pin (loie épingle)? 47. This bonnet (or hat) is very becoming (voîis coiffe) to you. [0/ hats^ bonnets, 6^^., the expression coiifer is used in the sense of tO be becoming ; but of dresses 07ie says faire or aller.] Compare phrase 27. 48. I dress my hair (/e me coiffe) to suit my own taste. ^9. This is a very fine hat, and it is quite fashionable {or quite the style [à la mocW]). 50. The shape {la forme) is rather large {iin peu large). 51. Are you done with your toilette.^ Is your toilette completed.'* 52. This dress is very becoming to you {or fits you very well). 53. This dress fits you beautifully {vous serre bien) in the waist {la faille). 54. It is very well finished {or made). 55. She is not very {totit-à-fait) fashionably dressed {ha- billée à la mode). , -56. I must go to this barber's {or hairdresser's = coiffeur). 57. To liave your hair cut {faire couper les cheveux) or dressed {faire coiffer)} S S. I must have my hair cut. 59. He is shaving {il se fait la barbe). 60. Shave me, please. 283 2. 46. Avez-vous'^une épingle {âh-vêh-voû ziin nay-pain-gr) ? 47. Ce chapeau vous coiffe bien (se shâ-pôh voil k'woàf byaing). 48. Je me coiffe à ma façon {or à mon goût) {je me k'woàf ah ma fd^song). 49. C'esf^un chapeau qui est très-fin et à la mode {say teilng shà-pôh kêë ay tray faing ay àh làh mode). 50. La forme est un peu large. {Votre toilette est-elle finie {vôt fwod-lét ay-tëll fëé-nië)'^ Avez-vous^'achevé votre toilette {zà-sh'vay vôt t 'woâ- lët) ? ^ 52. Cet^habit vous va fort bien. (Compare phrase 47.) 53. Cet '"habit vous serre {o?- vous prend) bien la taille {se tà-bëë voil sërr [prâng] byaing làh tà-yè), 54. Il est très-bien fait. 55. Elle n'est pas^habillée tout-à-fait à la mode {ell nay pàh zâ-bëë-yéh toû-tâ-fay àh làh mode). 56. Il faut que j'entre chez ce coiffeur {ke jàng-tr' shay se k'woà-feûr). 57. Pour vous faire couper les cheveux, ou pour vous faire coiffer ? 58. Il faut que je me fasse couper les cheveux {coU-pëh lay shë-veû. ) 59. Il se fait la barbe. 60. Faites-moi la barbe. La barbe, s'il vous plaît. 284 6 1. Take a seat (asseyez- vous^), please. 62. Please raise {levez) your head a little. 63. A little to this side, pray. 64. Does the razor [le rasoir) hurt you {vous fait-il mal)^ sir ? 65. A little powder, sir? 66. Please {faites). ôy. Curl the hair, sir? 68. No, please. Comb it a little. 69. Part my hair, please. 70. Here you are, sir. Please pay at the office. i) Asseyez-vous, âe seated, is the imperative of the irregular verb s'asseoir (sâs-s-c'oâr), to sit down. It is conjugated in the follow- ing manner : Present. Je m'assieds {juâs-syëh). tu t'assieds {tâs-syè)i). il s'assied {sâs-sych). nous nous asseyons {zâs-say- yong). vous vous asseyez {zâssay-yêh). ils s'asseient {sâs-say). Preterite. Je m'assis {mâs-sêê), tu t'assis {lâs-sêê). il s'assit {sâs-sëê). nous nous assîmes {zâs-sëêm). vous vous assîtes {zâs-sêêl). ils s'assirent {sâs-sêêr). Imperfect. Je m'asseyais {mâs-say-yay). tu t'asseyais {tâs-say-yay). il s'asseyait {sas-say-yay). nous nous asseyions {zâs-sa)'^ yiong ). vous vous asseyiez (zâs-say-yiêA). ils s'asseyaient (sâs-say-yay). Pe'fect. Je me suis assis {zâs-sêê). tu t'es assis {zâs-sêê'). il s'est assis {ta^-sêc'). nous nous sommes assis (sJj-j//). vous vous êtes assis {zâs-suy. ils se sont assis (AFx-j^v). Future. Je m'assiérai ^r Je m'asseierai {mâs-sèè-ë-rêh or rnâs-së-yè-rëh). tu t'assiéras or tu t'asseierns. il s'assiéra or il s'asseiera. 285 6i. Asseyez-vous^ {às-sey-yêh\ s'il vous plaît. 62. Levez^un peu la tête, s'il vous plaît {lé-vêh zeûng peU làh tayt). 6^^. Un peu de ce côté-ci, je vous pnç [eûng J>e?7 dé se co-tay' see ^ je voû prêe). 64. Le rasoir {le ràh-z woâr) vous fait-il mal, monsieur? 65. Un peu de poudre de riz (pôô-dr' d'7'ëë), monsieur? 66. Faites {or Oui, s'il vous plaît). 67. Un coup^ de fer, monsieur {eiïjig coû dyér m'syeuJi) ? 68. Oh non, je vous^en prie. Un coup de brosse, s'il vous plaît {je voû zàng prie; eûng coiî de bross, séê voû play). 69. Faites-moi la raie, s'il vous plaît. 70. Voilà, monsieur. Au comptoir ^ s'il vous plaît {ôh co/ig-fiuodr sêê voû play). nous nous assiérons or nous nous asseierons. vous vous assiérez or vous vous asseierez. ils s'assiéront or ils s'asseieront. Imperative. Assieds-toi {âs-syêh twoâh). asseyons-nous {às-së-yong voû). asseyez-vous {às-së yéh voû). Participles. s'asseyant {sà-së-yâng). assis {as-sêê). Près. Subj. Que je m'assoie {niàs-sey). que tu t'asseies, qu'il s'asseie. que nous nous asseyions. que vous vous asseyiez. qu'ils asseient. 2) Le coup {koû) means literally the blow, stroke, knock, and is used almost as frequently as the verb to jix by Americans. Thus we say in French: Un coup de peigne {eûng koû dë-pën-yë), s'il vous plaît, please comb my hair {literally : a stroke of the comb, peigne). Un coup de brosse, s'il vous plaît, please brush my hair (= a stroke of the brush, brosse). — Donnez un coup de balai à cette chambre {don- nêh zeûng koû d'bâ lay â/i sët skàng-br), sweep this room, please (=:give a stroke of the broom [balai'] to this room), &c., &c, 3) All the money is received in French sh'aving-saloons and in most other mercantile establishments by the dame dtc comptoir {dâhm du cong-t'woâr), lady-cashier. One pays for shaving by saying ; Une barbe ; tor hair- cutting by saying : Une taille or Une coupe. rrp 286 3. Terms of Regret. 1. I am sorry that. . . . 2. I am very sorry for it 3. I regret it exceedingly. 4. I am very sorry to ... , 5. With the best will [la volonté) in the world I could not do so. 0. I could not do so, even if {quand vicme) I should like to. 7. I am exceedingly sorry that I cannot render you this service. i) It will be observed that hardly any of these terms have been translated literally. The French are more polite — at least in expressions — than we are, and the French idioms must therefore be committed to memory. 2) The irregular verb vouloir {votï-f^i'oâr), to be willing, is thus conjugated : Present. Je veux {veit). tu veux {vcû). il veut {veû). nous voulons {voil-long). vous voulez (z'oû-lêh). ils veulent {%'eûl). Imperfect. Je voulais, I was willing ; I de- sired ; I wanted, tu voulais, il voulait, nous voulions, vous vouliez, ils voulaient. 287 3. Formules de regrets 2. Je suis fâché que {with the subjufictive mood following). ij'en suis fâché. Cela me fait de la peine {pain). J'en suis désolé {Jàfig swêë day-zô-lay). J'en suis au désespoir {dh day-sës-p'woâr). {Literally : in despair). 4. Je regrette beaucoup (or bien ; fort ; infiniment) que (with the subjunctive mood). 5. Avec la meilleure volonté du monde je ne ne pourrais le faire {à-vêk làh më-yeilr vô-long-tay dii mongd). 6. Je ne saurais le faire quand même je le voudrais^ {je ne sô-ray le fair kâng maim je le voû-dray). 7. Je suis au désespoir de ne pouvoir vous rendre ce ser- vice {je s'wëë dh day-zes-p'woàr de ne poû-v'woàr voû ràng-dr se sër-vëëse). Future. Je voudrai, tu voudras, il voudra, nous voudrons, vous voudrez, ils voudront. Près. Subj. Que je veuille {vcTï-yi). que tu veuilles {veû-yë). qu'il veuille {veû-yë). que nous voulions {voû-lyong). que vous vouliez {voU-lyéfi), qu'ils veuillent {veû-yë^. Conditional. Je voudrais, I should like to ; I want to. tu voudrais, il voudrait, nous voudrions, vous voudriez, ils voudraient. luiperative. Veuillez {veû-yih), be so kind as; will you please ? 28S GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. A. Reflectiye Yerbs. Verbs are called reflective or reflected because their subject and object are the same person or thing. The subject acts therefore upon itself, and is at the same time the agent and the object of the action. Reflected verbs have therefore, besides the subject, always another per- sonal pronoun, viz., me^ te^se (myself, thyself, himself, her- self, itself), for the singular; nous, vous, se (ourselves, yourselves, themselves), for the plural. It frequently happens that, in English, this second pronoun is omitted, whereas it must be expressed in French. Ex.: to repent, se repentir ; Près, I repent, je me repens, &c. Observe that all reflected verbs, without exceptiop, are conjugated with the auxiliary être, as : I have hurt myself,/^ /ue Sllis blesse\ and //^/ je m'ai blessé. The conjugation of the following verb may sersx as a model for all the reflected verbs. Se réjouir (se ray-Jou-êër), to rejoice. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Je me réjouis (Je 7né ray-Joû-ëë), I rejoice, tu te réjouis, thou rejoicest. il (elle) se réjouit, he (she) rejoices. 289 nous nous réjouissons {ray-j'oû-ïs-song), we rejoice. vous vous réjouissez, you rejoice. ils (elles) se réjouissent iray-Joû-îs), they rejoice. Imperfect. Je me réjouissais {ray-Joû-ïs-say), I rejoiced, &c. Preterite. Je me réjouis (ray-joû-ëe)^ I rejoiced, &c. \st Future. Je me réjouirai {ray-joû-éé-rëh), I shall rejoice, &c. -ist Conditional. Je me réjouirais {ray-Joû-ëé-ray), I should rejoice, &c. IMPERATIVE MOOD. Réjouis-toi, rejoice, réjouissons-nous, let us rejoice, réjouissez-vous, rejoice. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present. Que je me réjouisse {ray-joû-îs\ that I (may) rejoice, &c. Imperfect. Que je me réjouisse {ray-joi2-ïs), that I (might) rejoice, &c. PARTICIPLE. Se (me, te, &c.) réjouissant {ray-jofi-îs-sdng)^ rejoicing. 290 COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE MOOD. S'être réjoui, réjouie {ray-joa-êé), to have rejoiced. INDICATIVE MOOD. Perfect. Je me suis réjoui, -e [i'ay-Joi7-êê), I have rejoiced. tu t'es réjoui, -e {til tay ray-joû-êé), thou hast rejoiced. il ^est réjoui, he has rejoiced. elle s'es^ réjouie, she has rejoiced. nous nous sommes réjouis, -ies, we have rejoiced. vous vous êtes réjoui(s), -ie(s), you have rejoiced. ils se S07it réjouis, ) ^i , • • j •' ^ V they have rejoiced. elles se sont réjouies, ) Pluperfect. Je m'étais réjoui, -e, I had rejoiced, tu Vêtais réjoui, -e, thou hadst rejoiced, &c. Compound of the Preterite. Je me fus réjoui, -e, I had rejoiced, tu te fus réjoui, -e, &c. 2d Future Je me serai réjoui, -e, I shall have rejoiced, tu te seras réjoui, -e, &c. id Conditional Je me serais réjoui, -e, I should have rejoiced, tu le serais- réjoui, -e, &c. 291 Second Compound of the Preterite. Si je me fusse réjoui, -e, if I had rejoiced, &c. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Perfect. Que je me sois réjoui, -e, that I (may) have rejoiced, que tu te sois réjoui, -e, &c. qu'il se soit réjoui (qu'elle se soit réjouie), &c. Pluperfect. Que je me fusse, réjoui, -e, that I (might) have rejoiced, que tu te f lisses réjoui, -e, &c. PARTICIPLE. S'éta7it (m'éfa7it, &c. ) réjoui, -e, having rejoiced. In questions se réjouir is thus conjugated : Present. Me réjouis-je {better : est-ce que je me réjouis \ays kê je vie ray-jou-êé\), do I rejoice? te réjouis-tu {or est-ce que tu te réjouis), dost thou rejoice ? se réjouit-il {or est-ce qu'il se réjouit) ? &c. nous réjouissons-nous ? &c. vous réjouissez-vous ? &c. se réjouissent-ils (-elles) ? &c. Perfect. Me suis-je réjoui, -e, have I rejoiced ? t'es-tu réjoui, -e, hast thou rejoiced? s'est-il réjoui, has he rejoiced ? 292 nous sommes-nous réjouis, -ies, have we rejoiced? vous êtes-vous réjoui(s), -ie(s), have you rejoiced? se sont-ils réjouis, ] ,, ,. . y have they rejoiced ? se sont-elles réjouies, ) With the negation. Frese7it. Je ne me réjouis pas, I do not rejoice, tu ne te réjouis pas, do. il (elle) ne se réjouit pas, do. nous ne nous réjouissons pas, do. vous ne vous réjouissez pas, do. ils (elles) ne se réjouissent pas. Imperative. Ne te réjouis pas, do not rejoice. ne nous réjouissons pas, let us not rejoice. ne voiLS réjouissez pas, "do not rejoice. Perfect. Je ne me suis pas réjoui, -e, I have not rejoiced. tu ne t'es pas réjoui, -e, &c. il (elle) ne s'est pas réjoui, -e, &c. nous ne nous sommes pas réjouis, -ies, we have not re- joiced. vous ne vous êtes pas réjouis(s), ie(s), &c. ils (elles) ne se sont pas réjouis, -ies, &c. Infinitive. Ne pas se réjouir, not to rejoice, ne pas s'être réjoui, -e, not to have rejoiced. 293 With negation and interrogation Present, Ne me réjouis-je pas ? or ^ . ,. . ! do I not rejoice ? Est-ce que je ne me rejouis pas ? j ne te réjouis-tu pas? dost thou not rejoice ? ne se réjouit-il pas ? does he not rejoice ? &c. Perfect. Ne me suis-je pas réjoui, -e? have I not rejoiced? ne t'es-tu pas réjoui ? -e, &c. ne s'est-il (-elle) pas réjoui, -e ? &c. ne nous sommes-nous pas réjouis, -ies? &c. ne vous êtes-vous pas réjoui(s), -ie(s) ? &c, ne se sont-ils (elles) pas réjouis, -ies ? &c. Remarks. i) A great many verbs having no reflective pronouns in English are reflected in French. The following are most commonly used : Regular refiective verbs of the 1st Conj. S'affliger {sà-flëé-jêh), to be sorry, s'approcher {sà-pro-shêh), to come near, s'arrêter {sàr-ray-têh), to stop, se hddssex {bais-sëh), to stoop, se coucher {coû-shêh), to go to bed. se fier {fêê-êh), to trust, se figurer (/(^V-^«-;r/^), \ to fancy, s'imaginer {sêé-mâjèê- r to nêh), J imagine. se hâter, to make haste, se lever, to rise, to get up. se marier, {niâr-yéh), to marry, se dépêcher {day pay-she h), to make haste, s'écrier {say-krêê-ëJi), to exclaim, to cry out. s*enrhumer {sâng-ru-mëJi), to take cold, s'étonner {say-tô-nëk), to wonder, s'éveiller {say-vë-yëh), to awake. 294 se moquer {mô kê/i), to mock.scofF. se promener, to take a walk se reposer, to rest, se soucier [soû-syih), to care. se tromper {trong-pêk), to be mis- taken, se vanter {vângiêh), to boast. Exa7nples. I rise, I get up, je me lève. — Get up, levez vous ! I have risen ^rgot up, je me suis levé. We have stopped, nous nous sommes^ariêtés, &c. 2. Observe also these expressions : How are you? comment vous portez-vous? I am well, je me porte bien. I am mistaken, je me trompe {trongp). I have been mistaken, je me suis trompé. He is silent, il se tait {Lay). Be still ! taisez-vous ! B. Impersonal Yerbs. I. In every language there are some verbs which are only used in the third person singular. They are called impersonal verbs. Their compound tenses in French are formed by means of the auxiliary avoir. Such are : Neiger inayjay), to snow ; \)\Q\xwo\'cypleû-vivoâr\ to rain ; grêler, to hail ; tonner, to thunder ; geler {Jë-lêh), to freeze ; dégeler {day-Jë-lëk), to thaw ; importer {aing-por-teh), to matter Près, il neige, it snows, il pleut, it rains, il grêle, it hails, il tonne, it thunders, il gèle {Jail), it freezes, il dégèle {Jay- jail), it thaws, il importe {aivg-pcrt), it matters. 295/ Some other verbs become impersonal, when em- ployed in the same manner, viz., in the third person singular. Examples. il suffit (j?i/-//^'), it suffices, il semble {sàng-bl\ it seems, il vaut mieux {vôh m'yeû), it is better, il me tarde, I long, il manque {niângk), it wants, il s'agit {sà-jêé), it is the question. il convjent, {cong-vyaing), it is convenient. il arrive {ar-rëév), it happens. il reste, there remains. il ne tient pas^à moi {êêl ne tyaing pâh zâh m'woâh), it does not de- pend on me. Important Kemark. The Subjunctive Mood with que must always be used af- ter the following impersonal verbs and expressions ; il convient {kong-vyaing), it is proper. il faut, it is necessary. 11 importe {aing-pôrt), it is im- portant, it matters, it concerns. "il suffit {suf-fêé), it is sufficient. il vaut mieux {voh-m'yeu), it is better. And also after : il est fâcheux {fâhsheû), it is sad. il est temps {tang), it is time, il est juste {Just), it is just, right, il est difficile {dif-fêé-séêl), it is difficult, il est possible {pos-sêë-bî), it is a matter of course, it is possible, il se peut, it may be. c'est dommage {dom-mâhsk\ it is a pity, c'est^un malheur {say teûng màhl- eûr), it is a misfortune. Examples. Il faut que vous le fassiez tout de suite {fâs-syêh tout s'7ule't). You must do it at once. // importe beaucoup que VOUS y soyez (/// aîng-pôrt bôh-kôô kê voit zêë s' woàh-yêh). It is of great conseq*uence that you should be there. II faîidrait, pour vous donner des conseils {day congk-së-yë), que je connaisse vos affaires {kë je con-naiss vôh zâf-faif). In order to give you some advice {des conseils), it would be necessary to know your affairs. // suffit que vous le disiez {dëëzyëh). It is sufficient that you say so. // est possible {pos-sëé-bV) qu'il revienne à sept heures {rë-vycn âh sët teûr). He may possibly come back at 7 o'clock. Translate the following Exercises into English and, then again, without assistance of the book, into French : An lureau. 1. Veuillez faire le compte-courant (lé congt coiï-r5ngt = the account) de N. et Cie. — Il est déjà fait, monsieur. Après déduction (day-diic-syong) faite de leurs factures (fâc-tiir = accounts) et de leur à-compte {on account pay- 7nent)^ il nous revient (ré-vyaing = there comes to us) en- 297 core mille francs. Ils proposent (prô-pôz) de nous re- mettre un billet à trois mois {a three months noté). — Mais ce sont des déboursés {cash expenses). Ils auraient du {past part, of dévoi?') les compter (cong-tëh := pay) depuis longtemps. Ils ont beaucoup perdu {lost) dans la fail- lite {ï^-y^^t— failure) de D. et Cie., mais la maison jouit {enjoys) d'une très-bonne réputation (ray-pu-tâ-syong) et a toujours payé bien ponctuellement (pong-tii-êl-lë-mâng = punctually). — Eh bien ! en leur envoyant l'extrait {statement) de leur compte {account), écrivez-leur {write to them) que nous ne pouvons leur accorder trois mois, mais que nous disposerons sur eux {ive will draw on them) à soixante jours. Voulez-vous me dire à combien se monte (mongt = amounts) mon compte ? Je vais vous le solder {pay), — Le voici; il se monte à cinq mille trois cent trente-huit francs. — Voulez-vous le quittancer (kët-tâng-say = ta receipt) ? Voici cinq mille francs en or; vous pouvez vé- rifier (vay-rêë-fyëh =: verify) les rouleaux (roû-lôh = 7WA). Pour ce qui reste {for the rest ; remainder), vous m'obli- geriez si vous vouliez me prendre ce billet à-ordre {note), — Quand est-il payable (pay-yâ-bl')? — Dans un mois. — Tenez, voyez ! ' Au quinze Juillet prochain (prô-shaing r= next) Je paierai à monsieur La Rue, ou à son ordre, la somme de trois cent quarante francs, valeur (vâ-leûr =■ value) reçue co??iptant. .Paris, le treize Avril 1881.' — Quel est ce nom-là. — Je ne connais pas le souscripteur (soû- 298 scrïp-teûr = maker) ^ mais les endosseurs (lay-zâng- do- seur = the ifidorsers) sont bons. — Je n'aimerais pas être obligé de le faire protester. Exercise. The pupil must put all the verbs in ùa/ies in their tense and person : Future. Je {se frapper). — Nous (r — \\{s'avancer)'>. — Elle {s' enrichi t)'>. — Nous {s'ar- rêter) ? — Vous {se tromper) ? — Ils {se fâcher) ? — Elles {se moquer) ? Nous {se fer) ? — Je {se fgurer)! — Elles (jollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise., and questions must be written on a separate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO., 10 and 12 Dfy Street, Xew Tork. ^lîjj ^mt4($#ît-|g$(p, FRENCH. PART XL XL 1. To Ask and Answer. 1. Who is there? 2. Who are you ? 3. To whom have I the honor to speak ? 4. What is your name ? My name is Garnier. (Literally : I call myself Gamier.) 5. What is it you want ? (What do you want ?) 6. What do you desire ? 7. I want to speak to you. 8. I have something to say to you. (I must tell you something.) 9. Do you know me } — I have not the honor of knowing you. 10. Listen to me. — I am listening to you. 11. Do you understand me? — I do not understand you. — I did not understand you. 12. Why do you not answer.^ 13. I did not quite understand. (I did not hear well.) 14. I beg your pardon, sir ? XL 1. Pour Questionner et Répondre (këst-yon-nëh ay ray- pong-dr'). 1. Qui est là {kéë ay làh) ? 2. Qui êtes-vous ? 3. A qui ai-je l'honneur de parler {âh këë ai-jê îon-neûr de pàr-Wï) ? 4. Comment vous^appelez-vous {kom-màng voû zàp-pe-lëh voii) ? Je m'appelle Garnier. 5. Que voulez-vous? 6. (^\xç^ àih,'ih.x^z-voM^ {kê day-zëë-rëhvou)'^ 7. J'ai besoin {be-zo-aing) de vous parler. 8. J'ai quelque chose à vous dire {jay kèl-kê shôhs àh voû dëër). 9. Me connaissez-vous ? Je n'ai pas l'honneur de vous connaître {me cô-nais-sëh-voû ? je nay pàh Ion-neûr de voû con-nay-U'). 10. Ecoutez-moi. — Je vous^écoute {ay-co,û-tëh m'wôah ; je voû zay-coi~it). 11. Me comprenez-vous ? — Je ne vous comprends {cofig- pràrig) pas. Je ne vous^ai pas compris {cong-prëë). 12. Pourquoi ne répondez vous pas {ray-pong-dëh-voû pàh) ? 13. J'avais mal entendu {màh lâng-tân^-du), 14. Plaîtril {piqy-tëël) ? 302 15. What do you mean ? 16. Come nearer (= approach, approchez) ; I have some- thing to say to you. 17. I have to tell you some little thing (= word, mot), 18. What can I do for you ? 19. Can I do anything for you ? 20. Do you understand ? 21. Do you understand me? 22. Do you understand me now {mainienant) ? 23. I understand you very well {fort Men). 24. Do you understand what I am telling you ? 25. What do you say {or What are you saying) ? 26. What in the world do you mean {or What is that you are saying) ? 27. What did you say? 28. I did not say anything. 29. Do you understand what I say ? 30. Will you please repeat it ? 31. Will you have the kindness to repeat it ? 32. Did you not tell me that. ... {or Have you not told me that....)? 33. Who told you that {cela) ? 34. Who in the world has told you that ? 35. I have been told so {— One has told it me). 36. Somebody told me so. 37. I have heard it said. 303 15. Que voulez-vous dire {déér) ? 16. Approchez {àp-pro-shêK) ; j'ai quelque chose à vous dire {kël-ké shdhs âh voû déér). 17. J'ai un petit mot (p'tëé môh) à vous dire (dêër). 18. Qu'y a-t-il pour votre service {këé àh tëël pour vôt ser- ve es) ? 19. Qu'est-ce qu'il y a (kayskëël ëë-âh) pour votre service ? 20. Entendez- vous (âng-tàng-dëh-vou) ? 21. M'entendez-vous {màng-tàng-dëh-voii)} 22. M'entendez-vous maintenant {matng-té-nâng) ? 23. Je vous^entends fort bien {Je voû zàng-tàng fôhr by^ aing). 24. Entendez-vous ce que je dis {se kë Je dëë) ? 25. Que dites-vous {kë dëët-vou) ? 26. Qu'est-ce que vous dites {kays-kë voû dëët) ? 27. Qu'avez-vous dit {kàh-vëh voû 28. Je n'ai rien dit {Je nay rëë-aing dëë). 29. Comprenez-vous ce que je dis {cong-prë-nëh-voû se kë Je dëë) ? 30. Voulez-vous bien répéter {byaing ray-pay-tëh) ? 31. Voulez-vous^avoir la bonté de répéter {zd-v'^woâr la h boîig-tay de ray-pay-tëh) ? 32. Ne m'avez-vous pas dit que. .I .? 33. Qui vous'^'a dit cela {këë voû zâh dëë së-làh) ? 34. Qui est-ce qui vous^a dit cela {këë ays këë voû zâh dêe së-làh) ? 35. On me l'a dit {ong me lâh dëë). ' 36. Quelqu'un {kël-keûng) me l'a dit. 37. Je l'ai entendu dire ( Je lay âng-fâng-du dëër). 804 38. How do you call this ? 39. How is this called ? 40. That is called 41. That is called. . . . 42. May I ask you ? {or May I inquire of you ? or May I beg you) ? 43. What is it ? 44. What is the use of. that? 45. What is this? 46. What does that mean {— What will this say)? To Affirm or Deny, I say yes. I say no. I tell you that .... I assure you that. . . . I tell you it is true. It is certain. It is a fact. I warrant it (or I guarantee it). I guarantee you the fact. i) ï7 sert is the third person singular of the irregular present ot 305 38. Comment^appelez-vous cela {kôm-mâiig tâp-pè-lêh voil slàh) ? 39. Comment cela s'appelle-t-il {kôm-màng s'iàh sàp-pël- têèl) ? j _ _- appelle cela j Ona ( Cela s'appelle 41. C'est ce qu'on nomme {says-kong nom), Puis-je vous demander ? Oserais-je vous demander ? Oserais-je vous prier {prêé-éh) ? l Peut-on vous demander ? 43. Qu'est-ce que c'est (kays-ke say) ? 44. A quoi cela sert-il ? ^ Qu'est-ce que cela {kays-kê slâK) ? 45. Qu'est-ce que c'est que cela (kays-kë say kë s'iàh) ? 46. Qu'est-ce que cela veut dire ? 2. Poitr Affirmer oic Nier. 1. Je dis que oui {je dêé kë oû-ëé). 2. Je dis que rton. 3. Je vous dis que 4. Je vous^assure que {je voû zâs-sur kë ) . 5. Je vous dis que c'est vrai {kë say vray). 6. Cela est certain {cër-tatng). 7. C'est^un fait {say teûng fay). 8. Je vous le garantis {gâ-rân^-tëè). 9. Je vous garantis le fait. servir, to serve, to help. Près. : Je sers, tu sers, il sert nous servons, vous servez, ils servent {serz). 303 10. I suppose so. 11. I do not suppose so. 12. I fancy so. 13. You can easily conceive {or understand) that 14. Do you think so ? 15. I do not think so. 16. I don't know what you mean. 17. Is it true that ? 18. Yes, it is certain. 19. I answer for it. 20. I am certain of it. 21. I am sure of it. 22. You may be convinced of it. 23. You may believe me as to that (ew). 24. I can assure you of it. 25. It cannot be true. i) The pupil must learn the irregular verb savoir (ja-i-woar), to know. Present. Je sais(jres.: ôissint {dêi-sâng). — Part. past.: dit. — Près.: Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous disons, \ous dites, Ws disent {dêêz). — Imper/. : Je disais, tu disais, &c. — Prêt. : Je dis (dcê\ 309 26. C'est la vérité. 27. Je vous^assure qu'il en^est^ainsi (je voU zàs-sur kêël àng nay-taing-sëe). 28. Cela ne se peut pas ! 29. Je vous^assure que non {je voû zàs-sur kê nong), 30. Vous^avez raison {ray-zo?ig). 31. Vous^avez tort {tor). 32. Il n'y a pas de doute {dôôt). 2,:^. Tout le monde vous le dira ^ {dëë-ràh). 34. D'honneur {or Sur mon^honneur, or Ma paroio d'honneur) ! 35. Cela s'entend {s'ia sà?7g-tàfig) {or C'est bien^entendu {byaing nàng-tàng-du). 36. J'ai d*e la peine à vous croire. 37. Je n'en sais rien {rëë-aifig). 38. Il n'en^est rien {ëël nâng-nay rëë-aing), 39. Est-ce tout de bon ? 40. Parlez-vous sérieusement {say-rëë-eû-zë-mâng). 41. Ne vous trompez-vous pas {ne voû trong-pëh voû pâh) ? 42. Je vois {je v'woâh) que je me suis trompé. 43. N'est-ce pas^une^erreur {naysë pcih ziln nër-reûr) ? 44. J'en doute {jdng dôôt). 45. Vous plaisantez {play-zàng-tëK). 46. C'est^incroyable {say taing-kroâh-yàbï). 47. Vous^êtes dans la plus profonde^erreur {pro-fông- dër-reûr). 48. On vous^en^a imposé {ong voû zâng-ncih-aing-po-zay). tu dis, il dit, nous dîmes {dêim), vous dîtes, ils dirent {dêër). — Fut.: Je dirai {déê-rêh), tu diras, &c. — Subjunct.: Que je dise {déêz), &:c. — Siibj. Imp. : Que je disse {dis), &c. — Imperative : Dis, disons, difes.^ 810 FOUNDATION SENTENCE. This Irish waiter looked as if he had had a drop too much^ when he came to take my letters to the post-ofQce. 1. This Irish waiter looked as if he had had a drop too much. This ' waiter (boy; bachelor) Irish had the look (the air ; the melody) of having' i) Before a masculine noun which begins with a roivel or k mute, cfi is used instead of ce. Ex.; cet^enfant {se tâtio-fàng), this child ; cet'^homme {sc tô»i). this man ; cet'^arbre {si târb})', xh'xs tree. In the plural there is no difference. Ex.: ces_enfants {sav zâng-ftittif), these children ; ces^hommes {say zâm), these men- 311 FOUNDATION SENTENCE. Ce garçon irlandais avait l'air d'avoir trop* se gâr-song ïr-lâng-day â-vay layr dâ-v'woâr trôh bu, lorsqu'il est venu chercher mes lettres, pour bii lors-këël ay ve-nû shër-shay may lëttr' pour les mettre à la poste. lay mëtt-rah lâh post. 1. Ce garçon irlandais avait l'air d'avoir trop bu. se gâr-song ïr-lâng-day â-vay layr dâ-v'woâr trSh bû. Ce ^ {se ) {fem. cette ; plur. ces, these) garçon [gàr-song) irlandais {ïr-lâng-day) avait {â-vay) l'air {layr) {m.) d'avoir'' {dâ-v'woâr) 2) Expressions such as : the desire of seeing you, the honor of knowing her, &c., must be rendered by the Infinitive with, de, i.e. le désir de vous voir, l'honneur de la connaître. \\ est temps de partir, it is time to start ; Il avait l'air d'avoir trop bu ; Jai l'honneur de vous saluer {sâ-lû-éh),^c. 312 too much drunk* 1. Why do you look so angry? (Literally : Why have you the look of such bad humor {de si mauvaise humeur) ? 2. Mrs. N. looked very angry when {lorsque) I told her that he would not come (qu'il ne viendrait ' pas). i) Boire {b'7voâr), to drink, is an irregular verb. Present. Preterite Je bois {It'uoâh). Je bus. tu bois. tu bus. il boit. il but. nous buvons {bii-vong). nous bûmes {bum). vous buvez. vous bûtes {biit). ils burent {bûr). ils boivent {Vwoâv). Imperfect. Subj. Pre:ent. Je buvais, tu buvais. Que je boive. que tu boives. . il buvait. qu'il boive. nous buvions. que nous buvions. vous buviez. que vous buviez. ils buvaient. qu'ils boivent. Future. Imperative. Je boirai. bois. tu boiras. buvons. il boira. buvez. nous boirons. • Participles. vous boirez. buvant. ils boiront. bu. 2) The irregular verb venir {vë-\ ^êr), to come, is thus con Present. Preterite. Je viens {vyaing). Je vins {vain g). tu viens. tu vins {vaivg). il vient. il vint (7'aing). nous venons (vê-nong). nous vînmes {z'aingm). vous venez. vous vîntes {z'aingi). ils viennent {vyën). ils vinrent (raingr). 313 trop {trôK) bu * {pu) {Partie, past of the irregular verb boire {b'woâr) to drink), 1. Pourquoi avez-vous l'air de si mauvaise humeur (de sêê mô-vayze ii-fneûr) ? 2. Madame N. avait l'air de très mauvaise humeur, lors- que je lui ai dit, qu'il ne viendrait^ T^2is(kiëlnëvyaing' dray pàh). Jtnperfect. Je venais, tu venais, il venait, nous venions, vous veniez, ils venaient. - Perfeet. Je suis venu, I have come, tu es venu, &c. il est venu, &c. Future. Je viendrai, tu viendras, il viendra, nous viendrons, vous viendrez, ils viendront. Imperative. viens {vyaing). venons, venez. Conditional, Je viendrais {vyaing-dray). tu viendrais, il viendrait, nous viendrions, vous viendriez, ils viendraient. StibJ. Près. Que je vienne {vyën). que tu viennes, qu'il vienne, que nous venions. que vous veniez. qu'ils viennent [vyën). Sub. Imperf. Que je vinsse {vaings). que tu vinsses, qu'il vînt. que nous vinssions, que vous vinssiez, qu'ils vinssent. Participles. venant {vé-nâng). venu {vë-nii). In the same manner are conjugated : convenir {kông-vë-nëër), to agree, to suit ; devenir, to become ; parvenir, to attain, to reach ; prévenir, to be beforehand with, to inform ; se souvenir, to remember (je me sou- viens \soil-vyaing\ I remember) ; revenir, to come back, to return (cela me revient à l'esprit \/lâh me rc-vyaing-âh lës-prëë\, there occurs to me). 3U GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. Exercises and Words used in Common Conversation. CoDJagation of S'en aller, to go away. I give the conjugation of the irregular reflective verb S'en aller, to go away, on account of its difficulty to Eng- lish students. Observe that en is never separated from the reflective personal pronouns ;//', t\ s\ nous, vous, s'. This is especially noticeable in the compound tenses, viz. : Je m'en suis allé, &c. Present. Je m'en vais (je mâng vay). Je ne m'en vais pas {je ne màng vay pâli). tu t'en vas {tii tâng vâh). il s'en va {êêl sang vâh). nous nous en allons (noû- noû-zâtig- nâh -long) . vous vous en allez (voû-voû zâng-7iâh-lëh). ils s'en vont (ëël sang vong). ils ne s'en vont pas. tu ne t'en vas pas. il ne s'en va pas. nous ne nous en allons pas. vous ne vous en allez pas. Imperfect. Je m'en allais {je mâng-nâh- Je ne m'en allais pas. /av). 315 Preterite. Je m'en allai (/^/-z/rrt<-//), venison. 8. Pâtisseries {pàh-tïs-sê-rëê) (f. pi.). Pastry. un pâté chaud de légumes {lay-gûm), hot vegetable pie. ( Pâté de foies gras, un pâté de foies gras, < ( goose-liver pastrj-. 9. Salades {sà-lâhd) (f. pi.). Salads. une salade de céleri, celery sal- ad. une laitue {lay-tïi), lettuce-salad 10. Légumes {lay-giim) (m. pi.). des^asperges {day zàs-pêrje) (f.), asparagus. des petits pois {p'woàh), (au beurre), green peas, des'^artichauts frits {day zâr-têê shô free), artichokes (fried), des'^haricots verts {day-zâr-rêJ-coh vayr)y French beans, des choux-fleurs {shoo- fleur') (m.), cauliflowers. une salade de concombres {cong" congb'r), cucumber-salad. du cresson {crë-so/ig), cresses. Vegetables. des pommes de terre, potatoes, des pommes frites ( />///), fried potatoes, des'-épinards {day-:-"' ^■"^-"''-^ (m.), spinach, des carottes (f.), carrots, des'^oignons {day z'woân-y.^r.^) (m.), onions, du macaroni, macaroni. 319 II. Entremets au sucre. {âng-tr-may ôh su-cr'). une omelette, omelet, une omelette au rhum, omelet with rum. 12. Dessert (dë-sayr) (m.). du fruit {fru-êe), fruit. des pruneaux {pril-nd) (m. pi.), stewed prunes. une compote de pommes {cong- pô de pôm), stewed apples. des confitures de groseilles {kong- féë-tûr dë-gro-zéyé), red currant jam. de la gelée de groseilles, red cur- rant jelly. une marmelade d'abricots {dâ- brêê-kôh), marmalade of apri- cots. une meringue à la crème {kraym), meringue with jelly. des macarons imâ-kâ-rong') (m. pi.), macaroons. Sweet dishes. des beignets {bën-yêh), de pom- mes, apple fritters. Desserts. des biscuits (m. pi.), biscuits, une compote de pêches {paysh)^ stewed peaches, des (quatre-) mendiants {mâng- dyâng) (m. pi.), raisins, figs, nuts, and almonds, du fromage à la crème, cream cheese, du fromage de Gruyère, Gruyère cheese, du fromage de Brie {brêé), Brie cheese, du fromage de Roquefort, Roque- fort cheese, des prunes à l'eau-de-vie {iôh-de- vie), prunes in brandy. Translate the following Exercise ^ into English and then render it again into French : On sonne (Somebody is ringing). Serait-ce monsieur B.? — Madame, veut-elle recevoir monsieur B.? — Faites- le entrer dans le petit salon. — Madame, j'ai l'honneur 320 de vous souhaiter {to wish) le bonjour. — Bonjour mon- sieur ; donnez-vous donc la peine de vous asseoir. Com- ment vous portez-vous ? — Très-bien, madame, je vous remercie ; et vous-même ? — J'ai été un peu enrhumée, mais je vais très-bien aujourd'hui. — Je suis charmé de vous voir rétablie. — Vous êtes bien aimable d'avoir pensé à moi. — Je me suis présenté (pray-zâng-tay) plu- sieurs fois chez vous, mais je n'ai pas eu l'avantage (lâ- vâng-tâhje =///(? happiness) de vous rencontrer (meet). On doit {they viiist) vous avoir remis {given) ma carte. — En effet {yes^ indeed)^ et je regrette bien de ne pas m'être trouvée chez moi pour vous recevoir. — Comment va monsieur votre père? — Il est indisposé depuis quelques jours, il est obligé de garder la chambre. — J'en suis bien *fâché. J'espère que cela ne sera rien. — C'est peu de chose (/'/ is a mere trifle) ; mais à son âge il lui faut des soins {he must be careful). With a Physician. i) I have taken {pris = prëê) the liberty to send {en- voyer chercher) for you, doctor. — Why, what is the mat- ter with you ? How do you feel {comment vous trouvez- vous) ? — I am not at all [du tout ) well. I feel [Je //.'. sens = sang) very ill. — 2) Since when are you ill ? — How did this {ce/a) begin ? — It {ce/a) took me yesterday in consequence of {par) a chill {un frisson ={ris-song) : and then {ensuite = âng-s'wëêt) I perspired (/r^/w^/W/'^t râng- spëë-rëh) very much. — 3) Did you feel sick (= Have you felt [i-iV/Z/^sâng-tëë] sick [des maux de coeur]) ? — Ves, 321 I feel sick and am inclined to vomit {— and have inclina- tion [des envies = day zâng-vëê] to vomit). •— Show me {voyons) your tongue (langue). — You will have (// vous faudra) to take a little medicine {une petite médecine). — 4) Give me your arm {bras = brâh). Your pulse {pouls) is rather high {un peu élevé). There is some fever {de la fièvre = fëë-ay-vr'). — You have a little fever. — 5) Do you think my illness dangerous {dangereuse = dâng-jë- reûse) ? — No, but we must take care {prendre garde) so that it may not become {devienne) so. — 6) What have I to do ? — Have I anything else {autre chose) to do ? — No, only take care {ayez soin = s'woaing) to keep yourself warm {chaudement). — Be careful not to take cold. — 7) What kind of a night did you pass (= How have you passed the night) ? — I feeLmuch better, thank you. — I have slept {dor??ii = dor-mëë) a little, and the fever is quite gone down {diminuée = dëë-mëë-nii-ay). — 8) Very well, I can assure you that this will be nothing serious {rien de sérieux = rëê-aing de say-ryeû). — In two or three days you will be well {guéri = cured). Exercise, Which is the way to the Northern railway station {la gare du JVord), please ? — Go straight ahead, sir. — Which is the nearest {le plus court — le plli cour) way to go to St. Honoré Street ? — Go straight ahead ; you cannot miss your way (= you cannot mistake \yous trom- per'\ of [del ^^^ way). — Can you tell me if this road {cette route) leads {conduit — kong-d'wëë) to Amiens ? — • 822 You are on (dans) the right {vrai) road, sir. — You are not on the right road, sir. — To {de) which side must I go? — Follow (j«/z'^-2;=s*wëë-vêh) this street, it will lead {conduira) you to the great road. — How far may it be from here (=:How much can it there have \y avoir'] from here) ? — It may be about a mile (= It can there have a mile [un mille — méël]). — It is not (// ?i'y a pas) more than a mile. — It is {il y a) scarcely {à peine) a mile. It is {il y a) â good mile. — It is a little more than a mile. Exercise. Lettre cf introduction et de crédit. Lyons, 3 janvier 1881. Messieurs Michelet et C'^, à Paris. Messieurs: Nous prenons {we take) la liberté d'introduire {intro- duce) chez vous par ces lignes {lines) et de vous recom- mander à un accueil obligeant {kind reception^ i.e. to your kindness) Mr. Chas. Fruston de cette place. Nous l'accréditons chez vous pour la somme de dix mille francs. Veuillez bien lui payer jusqu'à cette con- currence {up to this amount) l'argent dont {whereof) il aura besoin et nous en débiter. Agréez {accept) l'assurance de notre parfait dévoue- ment D. ET C'^ COMPANION TO THE ^cViôed Kefôîon of the ScW ïeôtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on tho Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of tlie English Revision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BY À MEMBER OF THE IMEBICAN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revision of the Work and Co-operation of the New lestament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passsges in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons whi:h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of a// the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Committee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, lays of this book: " Many persons have expressed a desire that, iimultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons for such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire.;.. Nowhere else in print can be found a statement so full and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers, New York, writes: "Tho Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers would have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover all the changes made, and tp ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lost. ....AH this is Set forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligent interest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this little book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every mea.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-classes." "So valuable, interesting and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — JVew y>^k Observer. I'aper, 8vo size, 39 ccntg ; Clotli, I61110, T5 cents. i^*if For Sale by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, 10& 12 Dey St., N.Y. THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full, Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come to consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers* and Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent wiih accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, wiih numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will resemble the Bagster Bible, " Fac simile large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices within the reach of all. Thii "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, ce7'tified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, itcluding the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, jrinted in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m de in the " Bagster Bibles,'' with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be trinted in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King Jimes version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully prepared HELPS to the study of the revised Nf.w Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize wiih the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition of the New Testament ever issued. Popular Cloth Edition— Eeady in July— Price, Postage Free, $1.60. Send for prospectus giving- full description and prices of -finer Bindings. 1. K. FUNK&CO., Publishers, 10 and 12 Dey St., New York. THE |«$teï$t(!8ft $a$tctt(. A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT Ï:FF0RT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Lafe Director of the ^^ Akademie fiir frevide Sprachen " in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the '''' Meisterschaft College'''' in London, and Principal of the ^^ Meisterschaft Sc/iool of Practical Lin^uistry''^ in New York, FRENCH. IN FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. FART XII. NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened âhe ||dslcrâclmft ||chool of Practical Jinjuijtrj FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise^ and questions must be written on a scpaiate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Othce Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, 10 and 19 T>ey Street, 3>ir York. ^ï\t '^mi^utfi^U'^pli^m: FREN^CH PART XII. XII. (Continuation. ) 3. The old lady with whom you were at church is not beautiful, but she has a very distinguished appearance (Vair très distingue). 4. Why did that English waiter look so angry ? 5. My clerk is a^ Frenchman, but he looks like an Englishman {il a Vair anglais). 6. Your Irish servant looks like a Frenchman. 7. The old tailor whom my brother had in Berlin, did not look like a German, 8. He looks good-natured {il a l'air bon). 9. I met Miss B. ; she was looking very sad (elle avait Vair très triste). 10. He is very angry. {Literally : He is of ver^^ bad humor.) I. A.) The indefinite article is omitted heiovG national and professional names when the subject of the sentence is either a noun or a personal pronoun. Ex.: Ce médecin est allemand {tâA-lê-mânç), This physician is a German. — Je suis anolais {suèê zâvi;;-lay), I am an Englishman. — Mon père était avocat {tâ-vo-kâh), My father was a lawyer. — II est atuthicain {tâ-may-rëë kaing). He is an American. B.) But after r't'j/, rwV/and voilà and when the noun is qualified by an adjective, un must be used. ^.r. .• C'est un français, He (or it) is a Frenchman. — Voici un médecin. Here is a physician, — Robert était XII. {Continuation^ 3. La vieille dame avec laquelle {là vyë-yè dâhm avek là- këll) vous^avez^été à l'église, n'est pas belle, mais^elle a l'air très distingué {dîs-taing-gay). 4. Pourquoi le garçon anglais avait-il l'air de si mau- vaise humeur {de see mô-vayze iimem^^ ? 5. Mon ^employé {inông-nàng-ploâh-yêh) est français^ mais^il^a l'air anglais {zëél lâh lair ràng-lay). 6. Votre domestique {dô-mës-têëk) irlandais a l'air fran- çais. 7. Le vieux tailleur que mon frère avait à Berlin {bër- laing), n'avait pas l'air allemand {lair àh-lë-màng). 8. Il a l'air bon. 9. J'ai rencontré {ràng-cong-tray) Mademoiselle B. ; elle avait l'air très triste. 10. Il est de très mauvaise humeur. un officier {pf-fêësyëK) distingué, Robert was a distinguished offi- cer. C.) When one substantive is used to qualify another — in the so- called apposition — the indefinite article must be omitted in French. Ex : Berlin, ville d'Allemagne, Berlin, a city of Germany. — Jeanette, fille de monsieur Hachette, Jane, a daughter of Mr. Hachette. The indefinitive article must also be omitted after the word what, when used to express surprise. Ex : What a noise you make ! Qtiel bruit wons faites ! — What a man ! Quel homme ! 326 11. I am very angry. 12. Don't you think that this gentleman looks like a pedant ? 13. You look very ill indeed, {Literally : You have really [bien] the look of being ill). 14. He looks severe (chir). 15. This German minister looks like a man of the world. i6. I do not like this Irish coachman ; he looks suspi- cious (mauvais). 17. I saw your brother-in-law in the waiting-room of the Northern Station ; he looks very well {bien portant). 18. Your sister looks ill; is anything the matter with her ? 19. How well you are looking ! {Literally : What air you have !) 20. He looks healthy. {Literally : He has the air of hav- ing health [de la sante]) 21. Why are you so angry ? {Literally : Why are you of such [si\ bad humor ?) 22. Your employer (;?a/ro??) is in (^Zé') a very bad humor; he is very angry {fâche) with {de) you. 23. For the past three days (// y a trois jours que) our coachman has been very angry {=is if had humor). 34. This young man looks like a good-for-nothing {a Vair d'un vaurien). 25. He is not so stupid as {or^ He is not such a fool as) he looks. 36. How does he look ? \ 1 1. Je suis de très mauvaise humeur. 12. Ne pensez-vous pas, que ce monsieur a l'air d'un pé- dant {pay-dàng) ? 13. Vous^avez bien la mine {méën, or bien l'air) d'être malade. 14. Il a l'air dur. 15. Ce ministre^allemand a Tair d'un^homme du monde {deûn-nôm dii môttgd). 16. Je n'aime pas ce cocher irlandais; il a l'air mauvais. 17. J'ai vu monsieur votre beau- frère à la salle d'attente de la gare du Nord; il a l'air bien portant (por- tâng), 18. Mademoiselle votre soeur a l'air malade ; a-t-elle quelque chose {kélkê shohs) ? 19. Quel^air vous^avez {kël lair voû zd-vêh) ! 20. Il a l'air d'avoir de la santé hâtig-tay), 21. Pourquoi êtes-vous de si mauvaise humeur.? 22. Votre patron (pà-trong) est de très mauvaise humeur ; il est très fâché (fd-shay) de vouSi 23. Il y a trois jours que notre cocher est de très mau- vaise humeur. 24. Ce jeune^homme a l'air d'un vaurien {se jeû-nÔm àh lair deiïng voh-rêé-aing). 25. Il n'est pas si stnpide {siu-pëëd) qu'il en^a l'air (këël àng-nàh lair). 26. Quelle mine a-t-il (keil mëën nà-tëël) ? 328 i He looks happy {or amused \enjou'ê\). 2*i.\ He looks sad (^ris/e). ( He looks contented {content). 28. The affairs look well. (The affairs look bad.) 29. How does the matter look {or stand) ? 30. You are looking well. 31. She looks angry. 32. This young Englishman looks like a physician. 2,2f Ah ! you take an air of unconsciousness (or you make believe not to know \i = Kh.\ \allons !^ you give yourself the air of not knowing it). 34. He gives himself the airs of a scholar (de savant). 35. Whenever I call on this man, instead of receiving me l) The inrgidar verb aller, Present. Je vais {vay). tu vas {va h). il va {va h). nous allons {zâh-ïong). vous allez {zâh^lcli), ils vont {von g). Imperfect. J'allais, tu allais, il allait, nous allions, vous alliez, ils allaient. Pre le ri le. J'allai, tu allas, il alla. nous allâmes {zâh-Iâhnî). vous allâtes {zâh-/ôhl). ils allèrent {zàh-layr). Fitliire. J'irai { jêë rêli). tu iras {êê-ràli). il ira {êê-râJi). nous irons {zCê-nmg). vous irez {zêê-rêli). ils iront {zêè-rong). to go, is thus conjugated : Conditional. J'irais {jêê-y-ay). tu irais {êe-ray). il irait {èê-rav). nous irions {zëê-ryong). vous iriez {zèê-ryèh). ils iraient \^zêê ray). Perfect. Je suis ailé, I have gone, tu es allé, &c. Pluperfect. J'étais allé. I had gone, lu étais allé, &c. Suhj. Près. Que j'aille {kê-jâ-yê). que tu ailles (â-yè). qu'il aille {â-yë) que nous allions {zâhlyong). que vous alliez (zâlilyëh). qu'ils aillent {zâ-yë). Siibj. Jmperf. Que j'allasse {iâ/i las). que tu allasses (âA-làs), qu'il allât {â/i-lâà). que nous allassions {zâA làsyong) que vous allassiez {zâh-làs-yik). qu'ils allassent [zâh-lâs). 329 27- Il a l'air enjoué {àng-joû-ay). Il a l'air triste. ( Il a l'air content {cong-iâng). 28. Les^affaires sont bien. (Les^afïaires sont mal.) 29. Où en^est la chose {où àng-nay lâh shôhs) ? 30. Vous^avez l'air de vous bien porter. 31. Elle a l'air fâché {fâh-shay). 32. Ce jeune^anglais a l'air d'un médecin. 33. Allons ! ^ vous vous donnez l'air de ne pas le savoir (sâ-vwoâr). 34. Il se donne despairs de savant (sâ-vâng). 35. Quand je vais voir^ cet^homme, au lieu de (à lyeû de) Imperative. Participles. Va {vàh). Allant. allons. allé. allez. 2) The irregular verb vo\x {v'woâr), io'see, is conjugated in the following manner : Piesent, Imperfect. Je vois {v'woâh). Je voyais {v'woâ-yay). tu vois. tu voyais. il voit. il voyait. nous voyons {T/woàh-yong). nous voyions. vous voyez (v' woâ-yêh). vous voyiez, ils voyaient. ils voient {v'woâh). Preterite. Future. Je vis {vêé). Je verrai {vërrêh). tu vis. tu verras {vér-ràh). il vit. il verra. nous vîmes {vêént). nous verrons. vous vîtes {vêët\ vous verrez. ils virent (z///rj. ils verront {vêr-rong). Imperative. Participles. Vois {vwoàh). Voyant {v' woâ-yâng). voyons {v'woà-yong). vu {vu). voyez {7/ woâ-yêh). Observe that to call upon a p erson is rendered either by aller voir quelqu'un or venir toir. quel qu'un. 330 3^. 37. pleasantly, he frowns {= When I go to see this man instead of [au lieio de] making me good face \bonne minê\, he makes me a bad face [mauvaise mine'\), I drink but little wine. Do you want ale? No, thanks, I prefer water. 38. I must first {cValord) drink something. 39. I am dying with thirst. 40. Hand me {servez-moi) a glass of wine. |i. I should like to take another glass {encore un verre). i) The irregular verb faire, following manner : Present. Je fais {fay). tu fais, il fait. Tïous faisons {fay-zong). vous faites {fait). ils font (fong). Itnperfect. Je faisais, tu faisais, il faisait, nous faisions, vous faisiez, ils faisaient. Preterite. Je fis {fêê). tu fis {fe'è). il fit (/.v). nous fîmes {fêêvi). vous fîtes {fêêt). ils firent {fier). Imperative. Fais, faisons, faites. 2) The irregular verb mourir, to die, is conjugated : Present. Je meurs {meûr). nous mourons {moû tvng). VOUS' mourez {moû-rèh). to do, to make, is conjugated in the Future. Je ferai {fêrèh). tu feras {fë-râh). il fera ( fë-râh). nous ferons ( fë-rong). vous ferez {fë-rèh). ils feront {fë-rong). SubJ. Près, Que je fasse {fàss). que tu fasses, qu'il fasse. que nous fassions { fàsS'Vong). que vous fassiez {fàss-yëh). qu'ils fassent ( fâss). SubJ. Imperf. Que je fisse ( fîss). que tu fisses, qu'il ///. que nous fissions {fîs-yong). que vous fissiez {fîs-yéh). qu'ils fissent {flss). Participles. Faisant, fait. tu meurs, il meurt. ils meurent {met'ir). 331 me faire ^ bonne mine, il me fait mauvaise mine {ino- vayze mêën), 2fi, Je bois peu de vin. 37. Voulez-vous de la bière? Non, merci, je préfère de l'eau. 38. Il faut d'abord que je boive. 39. Je meurs'' de soif {?7ieûr dé s\è)oâf). 40. Servez '-moi un verre de vin (vaing). 41. Je boirais bien encore un verre. SubJ. Près, Que je meure {ineûr). que tu meures, qu'il meure. que nous viourions {moû-ryong). que vous mouriez {nioû-iyé/i), qu'ils meurent {/neûr). Imperative, Meurs. Preterite. Je mourus {moû-rù). tu mourus, il mourut. nous mourûmes {jnoû-rûm). vous mourûtes {moû-rut). ils moururent {moû-riir). Future. Je mourrai {moûr-rêh). tu mourras, il mourra. . nous mourrons, vous mourrez, ils mourront. Se mourir means to be near dyings to be fainting, as : elle meurt, she is fainting. 3) Servir, to serve, to help to, is thus conjugated : mourons, mourez. Mourant, mort {more). be Participles. Present. Je sers {sayr). tu sers. il sert {sayr). nous servons {sër vong). vous servez {sër-vêh). ils servent {sërv). Je servirai {sér-vêc-reh). tu serviras, il servira. servant {sêr-vâng). Se servir, to make use of and desservir, conjugated in the same manner. Preterite. Je servis {sër-vée). tu servis, il servit. nous servîmes {sër-vëëm). vous servîtes {sër-vëët). ils servirent {sër-vëër). Future. nous servirons {sër-vëé-rong). vous servirez, ils serviront. Participles. servi {sër-vëë). to clear the table, arc 332 42. I have the honor of drinking your health and that of your family. 43. That is the best wine which one can drink. 44. He is drinking out of {dans) a large glass. 45. He is pouring out something. 46. Pour me out some water. 47. What will you drink with your dinner.^ 48. Do you drink beer or porter ? 49. From preference I take water. 50. Please give me a glass of water ; I am dying with thirst. 51. To what can I help you {or^ What may I offer you) ? 52. Do you take soup ? 53. Thanks. I will trouble you for a little beef. It looks so nice. 54. Do you like it well done {bien cuit) or rare {2)eu cuit — little cooked) ? 55. Not too much done, pray. 2. Phrases used during a Ceremonial Call. 1. Does Mr. N. live here .^ 2. Is this Mr. N.'s {or Does Mr. N. live here) } 3. Is Mr. N. in {or within? or Is Mr. N. at home) } i) After the Superlative followed by a relative sentence, the Sub- junctive mocd is used when the relative clause expresses the viras and opinions of the subject. Cest le plus ^z^and des maux que je connaisse. That is the greatest evil I know. If. however. I wish to rep- resent the thing as certain or as a matter 0/ fact, the Indicative must 333 42. J'ai l'honneur de boire à votre santé et à celle de toute vo:re famille {/ah-mei-ye). 43. C'est le meilleur vin que l'on puisse^ boire. 44. Il boit dans ^ un grand verre. 45. Il verse à boire. 46. Versez-moi de l'eau. 47. Que voulez-vous boire à votre dîner {déë-nay), 48. Buvez-vous ^e la bière ou du porter? 49. Je prendrai par préférence {pray-fay-ràngs) de l'eau. 50. Donnez-moi, s'il vous plaît, un verre d'eau ; je meurs de soif. 51. Que vous servirai-je ? 52. Prendrez-vous de la soupe, monsieur? 53. Je vous remercie. Je vous demanderai un peu de boeuf. Il a si bonne mine {inéên). 54. Le voulez-vous bien cuit ou peu cuit {k'uêê) ? 55. Pas trop cuit, s'il vous plaît. Visite de cérémonie. I. Monsieur N. demeure-t-il ici {dê-meûr-têêl-lëë-sëe) ? ( C'est^ici (say tëë-sëê) chez monsieur N. ? ( Est-ce^ici (dys sëë-sëë) chez monsieur N. ? 3. Monsieur N. est-il chez lui ? be employed. Ex.: Ce ne sont pas les hommes les plus riches qui sont les plus heureux, The richest people are not the happiest. 2) The French say : hoi>e dans ua (not d'un) verre, to drink out of a glass; fumer dans une pipe { pêêp), to smoke out of a pipe. 334 4- Is Mr. N. at home? {i.e. for callers). 5. He is not in {or He is not at home). 6. Is Mrs. N. also not^ at home.? 7. Yes, Mrs. N. is at home. 6. Will you please tell me your name? 9. Whom shall I announce ? 0. Whom have I the honor of announcing ? ; r. Will you take my card? 12. Please walk in. (Walk in, if you please.) i^. Will you please walk in {or Step this way, if you please). 1. Whom have I the honor of addressing {or With whom have I the honor) ? 15. My name is B. 16. May I inquire whom I have the honor of addressing ? [The French say more correctly : May I knoix? Puis-je savûir?\ 17. My name is B. 18. Have I not the honor of addressing Mr. N. ? 19. That's my name, sir. ] I beg of you, be seated. Sit down, pray. Will you please take a seat ? i) Must be translated thus. Ex.: Are you going to the concert ? — No, I am not going there. — Neither am I. — Allez-vous au concert ? — Non, je n'y vais pas, — Xi moi non plus. 2) S'asseoir {sàs-swcâre^, to sii down. — Pari. près, s'asseyant {sàs- say-yà/io). — Pcjrt pr.: assis (<7-r-r,v). — Près.: Je m'assieds (/?w/rf.<---'^ tu t'assieds, il s'assied, nous nous asseyons {fiôô ;/i'.' zàs-sêh vous vous asseye/, ils s'asseient. — Imp. : Je m'asseyais ( />' mo 335 4- Monsieur N. est-il visible {ay-téél véê-zéê-br)} 5. Il n'y est pas. 6. Madame n'y est pas non plus ?^ 7. Oui monsieur, madame N. est chez^elle. 8. Voudriez-vous me dire votre nom {nong) {or Votre nom, s'il vous plaît) ? 9. Qui annoncerai- je (^ië ân-nong-se-ray~je)? 10. Qui aurai-je l'honneur d'annoncer (dàn-nong-séJi) ? 11. Veuillez remettre ma carte (or Voici ma carte, or Remettez ma carte). 12. Veuillez^entrer (j2 29. Good morning (^'r Good evening, &c.) [These phrases are used in taking leave.] i) Prendre {prâng-dr), to take, — Part, près.: prenant {pr/-nàng). — Part, p.: pris \ptêê). — Pns.: Je prends {prâng), tu prends, il prend, nous prenons ( prë-ndng), vous prenez, ils prennent (pn'»). — Imperf.: Je prenais, tu prenais, il prenait, &c. — Prêt.: Je pris {prêc), tu pris, il prit, nous piîmes ( prêèni), vous prîtes, ils prirent (/r,VV). — Fut.: Je prendrai {prang-Jrek), tu prendras, &c. — Près. SubJ.: Que je 33V 21. Prenez ^ place sur le sofa. (Prenez place sur cette chaise.) 3. 22. Qu'y a-t-il pour votre service {këé àh-tëël pour vôf sër- vëëi)y 23. En quoi puis-je vous^être agréable {àh gray-âbr)} [This phrase is more polite than the preceding one.] 24. Je suis à vos^ordres dans^un^instant (dàng-zeûng- naing-stâng), 25. Qu'est-ce qui me procure l'avantage {kays këë me pro- kur lâ-vàng-tàhjé) ? 26. Voudriez-vous m'accorder un moment d'entretien {fnô-mdng-dâng-tr^-tyaing) ? ij'ai quelque chose à vous dire en particulier (dëër àng pdr-tëé-cu-lyëJi), ] 'aurais à vous parler en particulier. Pourrais-je présenter mes^hommages {pray-zàng-tëh 28. •{ ^fi^y zôm-màhjé) à madame N. ? Pourrais-je rendre mes devoirs à Mme. N. ? Je vous salue (sàh-lù)^ monsieur. 29. \ J'ai l'honneur de vous saluer. J'ai l'honneur. . prenne {prëii), que tu prennes, qu'il prenne, que nous prenions, que vous preniez, qu'ils prennent {kcél prën). — hnperat.: Prends {prâng), prenons, prenez. — N.B. Conjugate in the same manner the com- pounds oi prendre : apprendre, to Itain ; rapprendre, to learn over {or again) ; comprendre, to understand ; entreprendre (àng tr^ -prdng-dr), to undertake ; surprendre, to surprise. ■:r' 338 GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. Demonstrative Pronouns, These are Masc. Celui {s'iu-êê), PL ceux {seû)j celui-ci {sé€)y PI. ceux-ci (seû-sêë)j celui-là {sliCêc-làh)^ PL ceux-là (seû-ldh)_ Fem. celle {cell), that, celles {ccU)^ those. celle-ci, this or the latter, celles-ci, these. celle-là, that (one) or the former, celles-là, those. Neuter. ce and cela (abridged ça), that ; ceci {se-scë) this. Observations. 1. Ce has only one form for both genders and numbers. Ex.: Ce fut mon a??n; ce fut mon amie ; ce furent mes amis j ce furent mes amies. 2. Ce is frequently used before the third person singular or plural of the auxiliary verb être, and means either t/iis or that. CVj-/quelque chose que je ne connais pas. That is something (which) I do not know. — Est-ce là votre malle .^ Oui, c'est ma malle. Is that your trunk } Yes. that is m\' trunk. — Sont-ce là vos bas ? Oui, ce sont mes bas. Are these your stockings.-* Yes. these are my stockings. 339 3. Celui-ci celle-ci^ ceux-ci^ celles-ci^ are translated this^ these, or this one, etc. These pronouns are used in speak- ing either of persons or things, when it is necessary to indicate clearly which person or thing is spoken of : This is my hat, celui-ci est mon chapeau. Celui-là, celle-là, ceux-là, celles-là, are used in the same manner, and must be translated by that, those, thatojie, &c. 4. Celui-ci, celle-ci, ceci, point out objects nearest to the speaker, while celui-là, celle-là, cela, signify those farthest from him, as : Voici deux livres ; prenez celui-ci, Charles gardera celui-là^ here are two books ; you take this one and Charles will keep that one. 5. Celui, celle, &c., must be used instead of celui-ci, celle-ci, celui-là, celle-là, ceux-là, &c., before a relative pronoun or preposition. They are then translated very frequently by the one who, or he who, she who, they who. It is my father's (that of my fa- c'est celui de mon père. ther), This horse is the one of which I ce cheval est celui dont je vous spoke to you, ai parlé. Translate the following Examples. Heureux celui gui trouve un vrai ami. — C'est celui-là qui m'a frappé. — Voyez-vous ces deux maisons } Celle-ci qui a coûté cinquante mille francs, ne vaut pas {is ?iot worth as much), celle-là que j'ai eue pour la moitié de cette somme. — Voulez-vous ceci ou cela ? — La rose et la tu- lipe {tù-léép, tulip) sont deux fleurs charmantes {charming flowers) ; mais celle-ci est sans odeur {odor) et celle-là 340 exhale un parfum (pâr-feûng, perfume) délicieux. C'est ^MxtovX (especially) à l'état de domesticité [in a domestic state) que le chien {shêë-aing, dog) et le chat (shàh^ cat) montrent la différence de leur charactère ; celui-ci s'at- tache à son maître (viaster), celui-là ne s'attache qu'à la maison. Of Possessive Pronouns. 1. The possessive pronouns are formed from the pos- sessive adjectives mon^ ton, son, etc. They are : Le mien {tnyaiug), la mienne (myën), mine (my own). le tien (0'a/;/c), ta tienne, ihine. le sien {■'lyaing), la sienne, his, hers, its own. le nôtre (nâtr), la notre, ours. le vôtre (vôtr), la vôtre, yours. U leur {leur), la leur, theirs. PI. les miens, f. les miennes ; — les nôtres, Us vôtres, etc. 2. They agree in gender and number with the object pos- sessed: Avez-vous rotre billet ? Oui, j'ai le w/>«. Have you your ticket } Yes, I have mine. Votre soeur est plus âgée que la mienne, Your sister is older than mine. Mon intention (aing-tdng-syong) est aussi bonne que la vôtre, My intention is as good as yours. Translate the following Exercise into French : i) Have you (any) rooms to let (à louer) ? Yes, sir, we have several. What kind of (quelles) rooms do you want ? Do you want a furnished apartment (un appartement 341 meublé) or an unfurnished one (= ^r not furnished) ? I need ^fai besoin de) furnished rooms. — I would need {il me faudrait) four bedrooms, a drawing-room and a kitchen. — 2) Will you be kind enough to walk in {en- trer). I will (=1 am going to) show you the rooms. Here is the parlor. — It is not very large, but it will do (= it can do my business). — You see there is everything you can want, sir (= everything that is necessary, // faut). There are four arm-chairs, six chairs, a new car- pet, a very nice looking-glass, and some very elegant cur- tains. Besides, {de plus) there are some wardrobes, — 3) Let me see the sleeping- rooms, if you please. — Here {par ici) sir, please. Let me see {voyons) if the bed is good, for that is the main thing {le principal = le praing-sëê-pâhl). As long as {z=z when, quand) I have a good bed, J don't care (je ne me joucie_guère) for the {du) rest. — 4) You , __ - " , cannot wish for a better one, sir. Does this room lie {donne) towards the street? — No, sir, towards the garden {le Jardin — jâr-daing). — So much the better {tant mieux = tâng m'yeû).— I think the bed is quite good. Now how much do you ask for the five rooms and the kitchen } — 5) I have always let {loue') the parlor with one bed- room for twenty francs. You can have the five rooms for forty francs per week. — I think that is a great deal of money (= much money). — But you must consider {considérer), sir, that this is one of the most beautiful parts {quartiers) of the city, where all the houses rent at a very high figure (= where the houses are of an exorbitant price). — Very well, I will pay you your price, but I need a part of your cellar {la cave = kâhv) to put some wood {du bois) and coal {du charbon). — 6) Of course {cela va 342 sans dire). You shall have a place which can be locked (blocked with a key \^fermée à clef'\). When do you think you will take (= to take) possession {possession — pos- sês-syong) of your lodgings? — I think to sleep here to- night. — You can come as soon as you like (= as soon as* it will please you [aussitôt qu'il vous plaird\). Interrogatiye Prononns. I. Lequel (//->è///) ? Laquelle (A/-/^.V/) ? Singular. Plural. Masc, Fern. Masc. Fern. N. ^ Ac, lequel? laquelle? lesquels? lesquelles? Gen. duquel? de laquelle ? desquels? desquelles? Dat. auquel? à laquelle ? auxquels? auxquelles? This pronoun is used either without a noun, or is sep- arated from it by de ; but it agrees wiih the noun it re- fers to in gender and number. When the pronoun which (of) is used interrogatively^ it is always expressed by lequel^ laquelle^ &c., as: Lequel de ses fils est malade? Which of his sons is ill ? Laquelle de vos soeurs est mariée ? Which of your sis- ters is married ? Voici plusieurs^appartements. Lequel choisirez-vous {ie kcll sh'iiioâ-zéê-rêh-voû) ? Here are several apart- ments. Which will you choose ? Auquel de ces messieurs avez-vous donné ma lettre? To which of these gentlemen have you given my letter ? 343 2. Qui (/è//)? Quoi {k'woâh)} Que {ké)} Masc. and Fem. Neuter. Nom. Qui^ who? Que ^ quoi, \\\i?i\,'i Gen. de qui, whose, of whom ? . (^^ what? from whom? ' (from what? Dat. à qui, to whom, whom ? à quoi^ to what, at what ? Ace. qui^ whom ? que, quoi, what ? Kemarks. 1. The interrogative pronoun qui'i is only used -of persons. Ex. : Qui est arrivé ? Who has arrived? Qui est là ? Who is there ? De qui parlez-vous ? Of whom are you speaking ? A qui est cette malle? To whom does this trunk be- long ? Qui cherchez-vous ? Whom are you looking for ? 2. Whose, when used interrogatively, must be rendered in French by à qui. Ex. : Whose book is this ? à qui est ce livre ? Whose trunk is this ? à qui est cette malle? 3. Quoi, what, is disjunctive, and is used either by it- self, or after a preposition, as : De quoi parlez-vous ? Of what are you speaking ? Quoi ! vous êtes marié ! What ! you are married \ Quoi ! il ne veut pas le faire ? What ! he will not do it? 3i4 4. Que ? wliat ? is co?ijunctive, and is only used before verbs, as : Que voulez-vous? What do you want? Que demandez-vous ? What do you desire ? Qu'avez-vous vu? What have you seen ? Qu'avez-vous? What is the matter with you? Que as an interrogative means what, never whom. 5. Instead of the simple form cut ? the form qui est-ce çuij who? is very frequently used for the Nominative, and qui est-ce que, vfYiova? for the Accusative (i.e.y Objective case). Qui est ce qui rit (rei) ? Who is laughing ? Qui est-ce que vous cherchez ? Whom are you looking for? Qui est-ce qui l'a fait ? Who has done it ? Qui est-ce que vous avez-vu ? Whom have you seen ? 6. Instead of the simple form que, 7i>hat? the form qu est-ce que? or even qu'est-ce que c'est que? is frequently used, but only for the Accusative (Objective case). Qu'est-ce que vous voulez ? What do you want ? Qu'est-ce que vous faites hi ? What are you doing there ? 7. What — 7vhen Nominative — may be given by quest-ce qui ? It must, however, be always the subject of the sen- tence and the pupil must be careful not to confound qui est-ce qui? who? with qu'est-ce qui, what? Qu'est-ce qui vous afflige {à/-flêêje) ? What afflicts you } Qu'est-ce qui vous étonne ? What astonishes you ? Qu'est-ce qui vous manque? What are you missing? 345 8. Observe the following idiomatic phrases : Qu'est-ce que cela (kays-kë sëlâJi) ? Qu'est-ce que cest que cela (kays kë say kè se lah)? ' Qu est-ce que la vie {véê) ? ) ^ I ^ ». 7 • w what is life .'' Qu est-ce que c est que la vie ? ) Quy a-t-il de nouveau 2 ) ^ , , ,., , ■,[- what is the news ? Qu est-ce qu il y a de nouveau ? ) Note. — The interrogative adjective what, joined to a noun, is al- ways expressed by quel, fem. quelle. — Ex. : Quelle est la difficulté qui vous arrête, what is the difficulty that detains you ? Exercise. Qu' est-ce que"^ vous désirez ? — Qui est-ce qui veut venir ce soir? — Qui est-ce que je vois ? — À ^///avez-vous parlé de cette^affaire ? — A qui est-ce que vous^avez parlé de cet- te^affaire ? — De qui est-ce que vous parlez? — Est-ce que vous^êtes fatigué, mon cher ami ? — Qu'est-ce qu'il vous^a dit ? — Il m'a dit, que vous^alliez vous marier (mâr-yëh = to get married). — £>e qui est-ce que vous parliez quand je suis^entré ? — Qui avez-vous^entendu (zâng-tâng-dù, heard) prêcher (pray-shëh, preach) dimanche dernier ? — Monsieur B.; il_a fait^un sermon (sër-mong) très^élo- quent (tray-zay-lô-kâng). — Ç/^'allez-vous faire demain matin ? Je vais^écrire au négociant (nay-go-zyâng= merchant) de qui je viens de recevoir une lettre. — C'est^une maladie dontjon ne connaît pas la cause. i) Give the rules why these relative pronouns have been used. 346 Words, Couleuj'S {côô-leûr) f. pi. Colors. Une couleur claire, A light color. Une couleur foncée {fong- A dark color. say\ L'incarnat {iaing-câr-?iâh)m. The carnation L'azur {/d-zi/r) /;/., The azure. blanc, blanche {l^lâng, white. blàngsh), bleu (bleil), blue. bleu clair, light blue. bleu foncé, dark blue. brun {breûng). brown. châtain {shà-taing)y chestnut. cramoisi {crâ-fn'u'oâ-zêê). crimson. écarlate {ay-câr-làht). scarlet. gris {grêê\ grey. jaune [j'one). yellow. noire {n'woàr). black. olive, olive. orangé {o- rang -Jay), orange. pourpre. purple. rouge (rôôje). red. roux {rôô), russet "^ . vert {vayr\ green. Le vermillon {vêr-mêê -yong)y The vermilion. violet (v€ê'0-lêh\ violet. COMPANION TO THE ^eVîôed ^efôîon of the Çevi/" ^eôtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on tho Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Eerisioa Cciainittee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BY À MEMBEB OF THE AMEBICIX COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revit^ion of the Work and Co-operation of the New Testament Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons which influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the I wo Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, Lut which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised Kew Testament. . The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Committee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, »ays of this book: •' Many persons have expressed a desire that, simultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons lor such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire Nowhere else in print can be found a statement so lull and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers. New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholart who were not at the meeting of the Revisers would have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover all the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lo&t. All this is Set forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligentinterest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this little book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every mcH.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-classes." "So valuable, interesting and usefulis this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — iV««; York Observer. Faper, 8-vo 8i«e, SS5 cents ; Clotb, 16ino, 75 cents. i^*i^ For Sa'e by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, 10 & 12 Dey St., N.Y, THE TEACHER'S EDITION OF THE REVISED NEW TESTAMENT With New Concordance and Index, Harmony of the Gospels, Maps, Historical and Chronological Tables, Parallel Passages printed in full. Blank Pages Interleaved for manuscript notes, and many other New and Indispensable Helps to the Study of the Revised Version. After the excitement connected with the sale of the first copies of the new revision, which lack the usual indexing headlines and marginal references to parallel passages, and also the appendixes of tables, maps, etc. — all of which helps preachers, teachers and Bible students have come to consider as absolutely essential to a working copy of the Bible — there arises an imperative demand for an edition of the Revised New Testament, containing all the marginal and appendix helps of former Teachers' AND Reference Bibles, adapted carefully and accurately to the Revised Version. We are, there- fore, preparing, as rapidly as is consistent wiih accuracy, such an edition of the Revised New Testament. The work is under the supervision of well- known Bible scholars, with numerous helpers, and will be issued as early as it can be done with thoroughness. In style and size the book will resemble the Bagster Bible, " Fac-simile large edition," known as "the Moody Bible," being the same width and length and size of type. It will be supplied at prices wiihin the reach of all. This "Teachers' Edition of the Revised New Testament" will be an exact, certified reproduction of the entire Oxford and Cambridge Edition, ÎLcluding the Preface and all the marginal readings and explanations. It will contain the appendix notes of the American Revisers, printed in the margin of each page by the side of the passages referred to. The parallel passages, to which reference is m. de in the ** Bagster Bibles,'' with numerous others, so far as appropriate, will be printed in full in the margin. The running headings, usually printed at the tops of pages of the King James version, will be here supplied. A small black mark will be inserted below the last letter of each verse to facilitate reference, and aid in responsive reading of the Revised Version. The second half of the volume will consist of the most carefully prepared helps to the study OF the revised New Testament, gleaned from the best Teachers' Editions of the authorized version, and supplied from various original sources — all being revised and adapted to harmonize with the Revised Version. We shall introduce many other important features, making this the most valuable edition "of the New Testioment ever issued. Popular Cloth Edition— Ssaiy in J11I7 -Price, Postage Free, $1.60. Send for prospectus giviK;; full description and prices of finer Bindings. I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, 10 and 1 2 Dey St., New York. THE Cï\ {mUutliixft $g$teq. A SIM'PLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY fmuli étx\t{m, ^^mhlh ««il Mm BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, Late Direi tor of the '''" Akademie fur freinde Spracken'''' in Brrlin and Leipzig^ of the ^^ Meisterschaft College"' in London, and Principal of the '''' Meisterschaft School of Practical Linguistry'''' in New Vorfi, FRENCH. IN FIFTEEN PARTS, ^hZH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. FART XIII, NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened m\t mmkr§âmfi %thd of jpraciical finjuiltrj FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The student does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wherever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French, Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire \o study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise and questions must be written on a separate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK &. CO., 10 and 1? Dry Stret-t, Xrir Yorh. ^Ifij ^Jît$ti|ïs4f(aît-Jp^tn, F R E N^ C H PART XIIL XIII. (Continuation.) 1. 30. I beg your pardon {or Pardon me) for having dis- turbed you {de vous avoir dérangé). 31. I hope you will pay me another visit shortly. {Lit- erally : Do me the honor of renewing [de renouve- ler] your visit shortly [bie?itât]). 32. The honor is mine ( pour moi), I am exceedingly honored. I am exceedingly flattered. [These phrases, which no English-speaking person would use, are I commonly employed by the French.] 33 Phrases during a Friendly Call. I. May I be permitted to enter ? j Do I intnide ? * I I hope I don't intrude ? 3. Pray do not let me interrupt you. 1^ XIII. (Continuation^ 1. 30. Je vous demande pardon (pàr-dông)^ de vous^avoir dé- rangé {day-ràng'Jëh). 31. Faites-moi l'honneur de renouveler bientôt votre vi- site (dé rë-noo-vëlëh byaing-tôh votr' véë-zëët). 32. L'honneur Qst pour moi. 33- /e me trouve bien^honoré. Je suis bien flatté. [Standing phrases.] Visite familière. 1. Est-il permis d'entrer («^-/^////;'-w/ me sauve tout de suite i^je me siro tôdt'Suéêt). Pas du tout {pdh dil too). Point du tout {po-aing dil-tôo). Pas le moins du monde. 6. Au contraire {công-trayr)^ je suis'^enchanté {zàfig- shàng-téh) de ^ vous voir. 7. Je suis bien'^aise (or^Q suis charmé, or Je suis ravi \râ-vée\) de vous voir. ( Enfin {dng-faing) on vous revoit, ) Vous voilà enfin. 9. Que devenez -vous donc? [ Comp. z;^«/>, page 163, No. I.] 10. Il y a un siècle que je ne vous^ai vu. (Comp. page 253, No. II.) 11. Il y a bien longtemps que nous n'avons^eu de vos nou- nous écrivons {nôô-zay-krèé-vong), vous écrivez, ils écrivent {êéi-zay' kréêv). — Ivtperf.: J'écrivais, tu écrivais, &c. — Prêt.: J'écrivis {jay- kréé-vêê), tu écrivis, il écrivit, &c. — Fut.: J'écrirai { jay-ktéè-rê/i), tu écriras, il écrira, nous écrirons, &c. — Près. Stibj.: Que j'écrive {ké jay-krëê2i),(\\xe tu écrives, qu'il écrive, &c. — Imperat.: Ecris, écrivons, écrivez. — N^.B. Thus are conjugated: Décrire, to describe ; circon- scrire {cîr-kong-sJzrëêr), to circumscribe; inscHre {aing-skrêêr), to in- scribe ; prescrire, to prescribe, to order ; récrire, to write again, to re- ply ; souscrire {sôô-skiéêr)^ to subscribe ; transcrire {irângs-krêir), to transcribe. ?\ velles ^ {kê nou nd-vong zil de vôh noû-velt). }\ 1 ■h 12. Il y a longtemps que je n'ai eu de nouvelles de mon- |!.!i sieur votre frère. 13. Avez-vous^eu de ses nouvelles .^^ ( J'attendrai de vos nouvelles pour^écrire. ^ ^* I Je n'écrirai passavant d'avoir de vos nouvelles. 352 You are quite a stranger. .( You have become quite a stranger. i6. And how are you ? [It is impossible to put these overpolite French phrases into common-sense Eng- lish.] 17. I am glad to see you. {Literally : Be welcome.) 18. It is very kind of you (de votre part or 2k vous) to call upon me. 19. I am so glad (que je suis content) to see you at last {enfin). 20. My father will be particularly glad ') to see you. 21. My mother will be very glad. 23. And my cousin too. 23. But pray be seated. 24. Don't you prefer {or Would you not rather sit ' on) the sofa.'' 25. Thanks, I have but little time ; I cannot sit down. 26. Thanks, I am ^) very well here. 27. I must go now. 28. Why are you in such haste ? i) If a noun is specially emphasized, c'est qui must be used with the subject of a sentence. — Ex.: C'est votre soeur qui m'a vu, Your sister S2LW me. — C'est votre patron qui l'a envoyé, Your employer sent it. — Before pther members of sentences cest que must be employed. Ex.: Cest à votre mère que j'ai donné ce billet, I gave this ticket to yourtnotJur. Cest hier que je le lui ai donné, I gave it to him yester- day. 2) Mettre, to put, to place. Part. près. : mettant. — Part. p. : mis {mëe). — Près.: Je mets (w^n), tu mets, il met, nous mettons, vous mettez, ils mettent {mëi^. — Imperf. : Je mettais, tu metcai?, &c. -- Prêt.: Je mis {w/t"), tu mis, il mit, nous mîmes {miêni), vous niî'es. ils mirent {méër). — Fut.: Je mettrai, tu mettras. &c. — Près. SuhJ : Que je mette, que tu mettes, qu'il mette, &c. — Imperf . Subj. : Que je misse {mïss), que tu misses, qu'il mît (wtv), &c. — Thus: Admettre, to 353 Ç Vous devenez rare {ràhr\ 1^. < On ne vous voit plus. ( On vous voit rarement {ràh-rê-màng). ^ i6. Permettez-moi de vous demander {de-màng-dëh) des nouvelles de votre santé {sàng-tay). ( Soyez le bienvenu {byaing vè-?iu) [to a gentleman]. I Soyez la bienvenue [to a lady]. i8. C'est bien^aimable de votre part {or C'est bien^aimable à vous) de venir me voir. 19. Que je suis content {cong-tàng) de vous revoir enfin {àîig-faing). 20. C'est mon père ^ qui sera content de vous revoir. 21. Que ma mère sera contente {công-tdngt), 22. Et mon cousin donc {kôd-zaing doitg). 23. Mais^asseyez-vous donc, je vous prie. 24. N'aimez-vous pas mieux vous mettre ^ sur le sofa ? 25. Merci, j'ai peu de temps, je ne m'assiérai pas. 36. Merci, y, to open. — Part. pr. : oui-rant. — Pari. p. : ouvert. — Près. J'ouvre, tu ouvres, il ouvre, nous ouvrons, vous ouvrez, ils ouvrent. — Prêt. J'ouvris, &c. — Fut.: J'ouvrirai, &c. — Imperat. : Ouvre, ouvrons, ouvrez. 3) Aller is followed by a when one travels to fo'u'ns, but by «'«when reference is made to countries, as: Je vais ^7 Paris; hut ]c vais eil France ; Je vais en Angleterre. 4) Devoir, to owe (ought to). — Part. pr. : devar.t, — Part. p. ■ dû. — 357 * 1. J'ai bien soif ; voulez-vous, s'il vous plaît, me donner à boire ^ {bô-âre) ? 2. Il n'y a plus de vin dans la bouteille (boû-tây-yê), il faut que j'aille à la cave {kàhv). 3. Ce n'est pas la peine {pain) ; donnez-moi de l'eau seulement {seûl-inâng). 4. Celle de la carafe {kd-râf) n'est pas fraîche : je vais^en^aller chercher d'autre. 5. On'^a sonné Pauline ; allez donc ouvrir '^ la porte. 6. Voulez-vous'"aller dire à monsieur B., que monsieur l'attend (Id-tàng) ? 7. Oil irez-vous passer vos vacances cette^année ? 8. Je ne sais pas^encore ; j'irai peut-être^en ' France {àng f rangs), 9. Eh bien, comment ça va-t^il ce matin ? J | 10. Ça va mieux, je vous remercie. \]\ 11. Vous devriez ^ vous lever ; nous^irions faire^un tour 1,, (tôôr). \\y 12. J'ai encore^envie [ràng-véé) de dormir.' \ , 13. En ce cas-là, j'irai me promener tout seul. Pri's. : Je dois {dwoâh), tu dois, il doit, nous devons, vous devez, ils doivent {dwoàhv). — Imperf. : Je devais, &c, — FreL : Je dus (c/u), tu dus, il dut, nous dûmes, vous dûtes, ils durent {(/iir). — Fu^.: Je devrai, tu devras, il devra, &c. — Condit. ; Je devrais, tu devrais, il devrait, nous devrions, &c. — SudJ. Fres.: Que je doive, que tu doives, qu'il doive, &c. — Subj. Imp. : Que je dusse. — y That's all right (c' est cela même), sir, thank you. ^Allow me to receipt (acquitter) your bill and to put (mettre) a stamp (u7i timbre^ on it (•_>'). — May I (puis-je) hope that you will recom- mend my hotel to your countrymen ? — With the greatest pleasure. — I shall be greatly obliged to you, sir. 364 Relatiye Pronouns. The interrogative pronouns qui^ quoi^ and lequel serve also as relative pronouns. The declension of quoi and lequel has been given. That of qui^ when relative, differs from the interrogative qui. Sing, and Plur. Masc. and Fern, Nom . Qui, who, which, that. Gen. de qui and dont, whose, of (from) whom, of which. Dat. à qui, to whom. Ace. que, whom, which, that. 1. Who, which, and that are rendered by qui, when they are in the Nominative case, whether they refer to persons or things, both for the singular and plural. L'employé qui a écrit cette lettre, n'est pas ici. The clerk who wrote this letter is not here. Passez-moi le plat qui est sur la table. Hand me the dish which is on the table. Les hommes qui l'ont dit, sont partis hier soir. The men who said it left last night. 2. The same pronouns — when in the Accusative — whom^ which, that^ are rendered by que. Est-ce là le chapeau neuf que vous avez acheté t Is that the new hat which you have bought .-* La leçon que vous m'avez donnée, est très difficile. The task which you have given me is very difficult. Observe that the French must always express the relative pronoun, though we frequently omit it . 365 3. Dont, whose^ ofwhich^ is used for persons and things of both genders and numbers. Voici la dame dont je vous ai parlé. Here is the lady of whom I spoke to you. C'est le monsieur dont il a acheté le cheval. That is the gentleman whose horse he bought. C'est une maladie dont on ne seconnaît point la cause. That is an illness the cause of which is unknown. Est-ce là le jardin dont vous m'avez parlé ? Is that the garden of which you spoke to me? 4. The Genitive de qui (both singular and plural) and the Dative à qui, to whoui, are used only when referring toper- sons} Le négociant de qui j'ai reçu ces échantillons, vient de faire banqueroute. The merchant from whom I received these patterns has just become bankrupt. Voilà le monsieur à qui j'ai donné votre lettre. There is the gentleman to whom I gave your letter. When, however, animals or inanimate objects are spoken of, auquel, à laquelle, auxquels, or auxquelles, must be used. Tel est le bonheur ^z^^^^é'/ j'aspire {Jâs-pëër). Such is the fortune to which I aspire. C'est le chien auquel j'ai donné à manger. That is the dog which I fed ( = to which I gave to eat). C'est une occasion à laquelle je ne pensais pas: That is an occasion I did not think of. i) Qui is mostly used after prepositions when persons are referred to ; but after entre, between, and parmi {pâr-mêê), among, we must always write lesquels or lesquelles, whether persons ox i\\\ngs are spo- ken of. 366 Les sciences {sëë-ângs) auxquelles je m'intéresse. The sciences in which I am interested. 5. Difference between dont, de qui, and the genitives of lequel. Dont is used when it is governed by a noun which stands either in the Nominative or Accusative case, as : Voici le monsieur dont je vous ai parlé. There is the gentleman of whom I spoke to you. Voilà une fleur dont la forme est très curieuse. There is a flower whose form is very strange. La dame dont vous voyez le portrait, est à présent à Berlin. The lady whose portrait you see is at present in Berlin. Le monsieur dont j'instruis les enfants, est très riche. The gentleman whose children I instruct is very rich. But de qui or duquel, de laquelle, &c., must be em- ployed when the noun which follows whose is in any other case than the Nominative or Accusative or \s governed by a prep- osition. (De qui refers only to persons, while duquel, de la- quelle, &c., may be used both for persons and for things), as : Las amis sur qui vous comptez, vous abandonneront. The friends on whom you count will forsake you. C'est un homme à la discrétion de qui vous pouvez vous fier. He is a man to whose discretipn you may trust. J'honore cet homme aux bontés duquel (or de qui) je dois ma fortune. I honor this man, to whose kindness I owe my fortune. C'est un régiment {ray-jcê-jnâng) à la valeur duquel l'ennemi n'a pu résister. 367 That's a regiment whose valor the enemy has been un- able to resist. C'est un jeune homme sur la parole de qui (or du- quel) on ne peut pas compter. That is a young man upon whose word one cannot rely. 6. Lequel, laquelle, &c., are used after prepositions when reference is made to things, while qui must be employed when persons are referred to. Ex. : Voilà le banc sur lequel je me suis assis. Here is the bench on which I sat. C'est une condition {kong déé-zyong) sans laquelle il ne veut rien faire. That is a condition without which he will do nothing. But : Le marchand avec qui^ j'ai voyagé, est mort. The merchant with whom I travelled died. 7. Lequel, laquelle, &c., must be used instead of qui or que, when by the use of the two latter pronouns an am- biguity might arise. As : La tante de mon ami laquelle demeure à Londres. My friend's aunt who lives in London. i^qui demeure à Londres, would mean : The aunt of my friend who is living in London, and would signify that the friend lives in London.) J'ai vu le cocher de votre cousine, lequel viendra vous voir. I have seen your cousin's coachman, who will call on you. i) Qui remains always unchanged, even before a vowel or h voyelle, as : L'homme qui arrive ; — à qui il parle ; — à qui elle pense ; — de qui on se plaint. 368 8. Such expressions as he who, she who, they who, those who must be rendered by celui qui, celle qui (fem.) ; ceux qui (pi. m.) ; celles qui (pi. f.). Ex. : Celui qui est content, est riche. He who is contented is rich. Je l'enverrai à celle que j'aime le mieux. I will send it to her whom I love best. Je parle de celui que nous avons vu chez le méde- cin allemand. I speak of the one that we saw at the German physi- cian's. J'ai donné le livre à celle qui a trouvé la clef aTCC la- quelle votre soeur a ouvert la porte. I gave the book to that one who found the key with which your sister opened the door. 9. That 7C'hich or what, meaning really ' that thing which' is rendered by ce qui for the Nominative, and ce que for the Accusative. — All that is rendered by tout ce qui for the Nominative, and tout ce que for the Accusative. Ex. : Aimez tout ce qui est bon et beau. Love all that {or everything which) is good and beau- tiful. Faites ce que je vous dis. Do what I tell you. Ce qui est beau n'est pas toujours bon. What is beautiful is not always good. 10. Proverbs and general statements usually commence with Qui, whoei'er. Ex. : Qui sert les malheureux sert la divinité. Whoever helps unhappy persons helps Providence. 369 Qui casse les verres, les paie. Who breaks (the glasses), pays (for them). II. Quoi^ what, is only used after prepositions referring to a whole sentence, or to voilà, voici^ ce, rien. Voilà de quoi il m'a entretenu. That is what he entertained me with. Je sais à quoi vous pensez. I know what you are thinking of. C'est à quoi je pense le moins. This is a thing of which I think least. A quoi vous vous fiez, est très incertain. What you trust to is very uncertain. Je ne sais à quoi il s'occupe. I do not know what he is engaged in. Quoi ! n'est-ce que cela } What ! is that all ? De quoi s'agit-il là.? What is the matter there 1  quoi s'occupe-t-il } What is he occupied with .? II faut qu'il signe {sëën-yë) le contrat ; sans quoi il sera nul. He must sign this contract ; otherwise it will be void. Avez-vous de quoi payer ces factures } Have you enough to pay for these bills ? II n'a pas de quoi vivre. He has not wherewith to live. À quoi bon de sortir par ce temps .? What is the good of going out in such weather ? Après quoi after which. — Sans quoi, without which, therwise. 370. Exercise. You have apartments to let {à loue?-) ? — Yes, sir, I have two ; one furnished, the other unfurnislied. Which of the two do you desire to see ? — I do not know vet whether I shall buy furniture or not {si je me ?nettrai dans mes meubles ou non). — In that case,; see them both {les deux). The unfurnished apartment is on the first floor, the other is on the second. — What is the rent (/..• parti {pâr-fëê). — Près.: Je pars {par), tu pars, il part, nous partons, vous partez, &c., as servir. Comp. page 304. — Per/.: Je suis parti. :?74 10. It has just struck nine. 11. It is just going to strike nine. 12. May I offer ^ you something to drink, madame.^ 13. I thank you very much, I have just had something. 14. Is it long since you saw Mr. D. ? 15. I have just met him, 16. Is Mrs. L. at home .^ — No, madam, she has just gone out. 17. Then {e?i ce cas) I'll come back in an hour. 18. I have just seen Mr. T. 19. Does he get on well in his business? 20. Yes, his business goes very well. 21. Have you called on Mrs. B. .' 22. I have been to her house, but did not find her in; she had just gone out. 23. Do you know that this poor C. has just lost his wife.' 24. I come to pay you my debts (= what I owe you). 25. You need not have come expressly for that, j Waiter, did you order a cab ? ( Have you got me a cab ? :-. Let him come. 28. Has any one called here ? -9. That happens very opportunely {foji â propos). 30. I have come expressly for that. 31. I shall be back at ten o'clock at the latest. 32. When did you return from the country? l) OJ'rir, to offer.— Farf. pr. : offrant.— /*d-sdng). Comme il vous plaira. Comme vous voudrez. Monsieur D. est-il chez lui ? ( Monsieur D. est-il à la maison {may-zong)} 14. Non monsieur, il vient de sortir (sôr-têêr), 15. Pouvez-vous me dire où il est^allé ? 16. Je ne saurais vous le dire^exactement (dëêr rèk-zàg-tê- mâng\ monsieur. Je crois qu'il est^allé voir sa soeur. 17. Savez-vous quand^il reviendra? 18. Non ; il n'a rien dit en s'en^allant. 19. Concierge, si l'on vient me demander, vous direz que je suis'^allé à l'exposition. 20. Je ne rentre pas (ràng-tr' pàh) de la journée. 21. Est^on venu me demander pendant mon^absence ? 22. Oui, monsieur ; deux de vos compatriotes (kong pâ- trêê-ôi) voulaient vous rendre visite {râng-dr' vêê-zëët). 23. Je suis bien curieux {ku-ryeu) de savoir qui peut-être venu le jour même de mon^arrivée (àr-rëë-vëh). 24. Ma foi, monsieur, je ne me rappelle plus; je ne peux pas retenir les noms^anglais. 25. Mais ces messieurs^ont dit qu'ils repasseraient de- main matin avant midi.^ :^82 26. If these gentlemen should call in (en) my absence, you will please request them to write their names and addresses (down). 27. I am going to the country. I shall not come home this night (or, I shall not stop at home [décùîicherai] this night). 3. Idiomatic expressions with aller and Tenir. 1. How do you do? 2. How are you? 3. How is your health ? 4. That will do. 5. That will not do (or, That won't do). 6. That's a matter of course {or. That is understood, or, Of course). 7. That suits me ; done ! 8. That does not suit me in the least (i?/-, at all). 9. This trimming is very becoming to you. 10. This coat does not fit you well. 11. Do you think that this dress fits me well ? 12. This trimming is too light; it does not match well. 13. That might do (or, That might answer). 14. This key does not fit this lock. 15. How^ old is he ? He is about ten years old. 16. It is very nearly 10 o'clock. 17. Business is very dull nowadays. 383 20. Si ces messieurs revenaient^en mon^absence, vous les prierez d'écrire leurs noms et leurs^adresses. 27. Je vais à la campagne, je ne rentrerai pas cette nuit {or, je découcherai cette nuit). 3. Idiomatic expressions with aller and venir. I. Comment^allez-vous ? Comment cela va-t-il ? Comment ça va-t-il ? 3. Comment va la santé ? Cela va. Cela ira {êé-rà). 5. Cela ne va pas. 6. Cela va sans dire. ■A -\ 7. Cela me va, j'en suis. 8. Cela ne me va pas du tout. 9. Cette garniture ( gdr-nêé-tiir) vous va très-bien. 10. Cet^habit ne vous va pas bien. 11. Croyez- vous que cette robe m'aille bien ? 12. Cette garniture est trop claire; ça ne va pas. 13. Cela pourrait^aller. 14. Cette clef ne va pas à cette serrure {ser-rur). 15. Quel^âge a-t-il donc } Il va sur ses dix^ans 16. Il s'en va dix^heures. 17. Le commerce va bien peu maintenant. 384 i8. Has he brought it about ?^ (or, Has he succeeded?)^ 19. You will never succeed witli it [or. You will never accomplish it). 20. I doubt if he can bring it about {or, if he can ac- complish it). 21. I do not think he will accomplish it. 22. I do not think you will succeed with it; the under- taking {V enterprise) is too difficult. 23. He spent all his vioneyP' 24. Did you read this book ? 25. No. sir, it is so tedious {ennuyeux) that I have not been able to read it through. 26. He married her at last. 4. to take them to the Post-Office. in order to ' them i) The pupil must study the following idioms: Venir à bout d'un dessein {dë-saing\ or Venir à bout d'une enter- prise {diin nâng-têr-prêézé) means to bring about ; to accomplish ; to succeed. 2) Venir a bout d'une chose, to make an end of a thing ; to bring a thing to an issue. 3) Pour is used before an infinitive to express an inteniion or de- sign, answering to the English in order to ; whenever therefore the English to before an infinitive can be changed into in order to. 385 i8. Est-il venu à bout' {bôô)} 19. Vous n'en viendrez jamais à bout. 20. Je doute (cîôôt) qu'il en vienne à bout. 21. Je ne crois pas qu'il en vienne à bout. 22. Je ne crois pas que vous^en veniez à bout; Tenter- prise {lâng-tèr-prêézc) est trop difficile. 23. Il est venu à bout de son argent"^ {son nàr-jâng). 24. Avez-vous lu ce livre ? 25. Non monsieur, il est si ennuyeux (àng-nii-éë-yeU) que je n'ai pu venir à bout de le lire en^entier {àn-nâng tyéh). 26. Il est venu à bout de l'épouser {lay-pôô^zèH), pour les mettre à la poste. pour lay met râh là post. pour' les (Ace. pi.) pour rsiwst be used in French. Ex.: J'ai fait mon possible /^«r payer mes dettes, I bave done my utmost to pay my debts. — J'ai fait tout ce que j'ai pu pourVç.Vi empêcher, I did all I could to prevent him from it. — Je suis allé moi-même /(7Mrne pas vous déranger, I went myself in order not to disturb you. The preposition /tjwr is also used before the infinitive after the words assez, trop, and suffissant (and after the verb suffi,re). Ex. : Elle est assez riche /^«racheter cette maison. She is rich enough to buy this house. II est trop jeune pour y aller, He is too young to go there. I ^^^ to put, to place, to lay, to set to the post-office. 1. Will you send for some wine ? 2. I will send for some. 3. That is what I am looking for. 4. Did you send for me? 5. Get this book, please. 6. Yçur sister is quite. ill ; I must get a physician. 7. What are you looking for so eagerly [= in such a hurry] {avec tant d'empressement) ? 8. He is looking for difficulties where there are none. 9. You are searching in vain (= heau). 10. What are you doing .^ It is like looking for {c'est chercher) a needle in a bundle of hay {une hotte de foin). 11. Take this letter to the post. 12. Till what hour can letters be put into the box which are to leave by the evening mails {par les courriers die soir) ? i) Mettre irregularly conjugated ; comp. p. 352, No. i. Observe the following idiomatic expressions : Mettre à la voile, to set sail. — Se mettre à crier, pleurer, rire, to begin crying, weeping, laughing. — Votilez-vous volts mettre avec moi. Will ^-ou be on my side (at play)? — Mettre à part {or de côté), to put aside. — Mettez votre chapeau. Put your hat on. — Elle se met avec goûl^ She dresses stylishly. — Mettre à profit {fêê), to profit. 2) Plaire, to please. — Part. pr. : plaisant {zàng).—Part. p.: plu. — Près.: Je plais, tu plais, il plaît, nous plaisons, vous plaisez, ilsplai- a87 mettre^ à la poste. 1. Voulez-vous^envoyer chercher du vin ? 2. Je veux^en'^envoyer chercher. 3. C'est ce que je cherche. 4. M'avez-vous'"envoyé chercher? 5. Allez chercher ce livre, s'il vous plaît.^ 6. Votre soeur est bien malade ; il faut que j'aille cher- cher un médecin. 7. Que cherchez-vous avec tant d'empressement {iàng- ddng-prës-sè-màng) ? 8. Il cherche des difficultés où il n'y en a pas. 9. Vous'^avez beau chercher. 10. Qu'est-ce que vous faites? C'est chercher une aiguille (ai-ghêê-yë) dans'^une botte de foin (fo-aing). 11. Allez mettre {or Allez jeter) cette lettre à la poste. 12. Jusqu""à {jils-kah) quelle'^heure peut-on jeter à la boîte les lettres qui doivent partir par' les courriers du soir? sent (playz). — Prêt.: Je plus, tu plus, il plut, nous plûmes, vous plû- tes, ils plurent {plur). — Fut. : Je plairai, tu plairas, il plaira, &c. — Fres. Stibj.: Que je plaise, que tu plaises, qu'il plaise, &c. — Thus also : Se complaire, to delight in ; déplaire, to displease. — SHI vous plaît, if )-ou please. 3) By-^\v\\\i thé passive voice — is usually translated hy par ; but it must be rendered hy de, when the verb denotes a sentiment or an in- ward act of the mind, as : II est estimé de tout le monde, He is es- teemed by everybody. 388 GRAMMATICAL REMARKS. Exercises and Words used in Common Conversation. Of the Indefinite Pronouns. On or Ton, one, they, people. Tout le monde, everybody. Chacun (shâh-kefing), f. chacune {shàh-kiin), each, every one. Aucun {ôh'keûng)^ f. aucune (ôh-kun)^ (with ne), none, not one. Quelqu'un {kél-keûng), f. quelqu'une {kél-kùn)^ some one, somebody, anybody. //. quelques-uns {kèl'kë-zeûng\ f. quelques-unes {kèl-kê- zùn)^ some. Personne («///// ne), nobody. L'un, e, — l'autre, the one — , the other. //. les uns (les unes), — les autres, the one — , the others. L'un (l'une) et l'autre, both. L'un (l'une) OU l'autre, either. Ni l'un (l'une) ni l'autre, neither. L'un (l'une) l'autre, Gen. l'un de l'autre, ") each other; //. les uns (les unes), les autres, j one another. Un autre, f. une autre, another. D'autres, pi. others, other people. 389 Autrui {ôh'trU-ëê), {Gen. d autrui, Dat. à autrui), others, another. Tel, f. telle, many a (man). Plusieurs, several. La plupart, most (with a following Genitive, as : La plu- part des hommes, most men). Quiconque {këë-kong), whoever. Tout, f. toute, ail, everything. //. tous, toutes, ail. Quelque chose, something, anything. Rien {with ne), nothing. Le même, la même, the same. 1. On and its use has been explained. 2. Aucun, personne, and rien are always used with ne y as : Personne n'a parlé. No one spoke. — Il na, rien fait. He has done nothing. — A vez-vous toutes les boîtes .-* Je «'en ai aucune^ Have you all the boxes.'' I have none. a) When, however, these three pronouns serve to answer a question — without repeating the verb used in the ques- tion — they caiinot take ne^ as : Qui est là? Personne^ Who is there } No one. — Qu'avez-vous ? Rien, What is the matter with you ? Nothing. h) In interrogative sentences or in sentences expressing a doubt and after words of a negative meaning, as safis^ Ja- mais, nulle part, ?ti, &c., aucun, personne, and rien are used without ne; aucun then stands for any; personne for a7iy- body ; and rien for anything. As : J'ai fait ce long voyage sans voir aucune de mes connaissances, I made this long 390 journey without seeing any of my acquaintances. — II ny a jamais personne chez lui, There is never any one at his house. c) These pronouns always require de before any adjective following the?n^ as : II n'y a rien de plus beau, There exists nothing more beautiful. 3. Not one or none are rendered by aucun ne or pas un ne, as : Aucun de vous n'y était, None of you were there. — Voyez-vous ces person?ies ? Je n'en aperçois auCUne (or pas une), Do you see these persons ? I see none. 4. Somebody^ some one, anybody, and any one are expressed by quelqu'un singular and masculine; some, pi. by quelques-uns or quelques-unes. Ex. : Somebody told me so, quelqu'un me l'a dit. Do you know any one here ? Connaissez-vous quel- qu'un ici ? 5. La plupart, most, takes the Genitive plural after it. The predicate must also be put in the plural. Ex.: La plupart de ces pommes ne sont pas encore mûres. Most of these apples are not yet ripe. 6. Another is usually expressed by un autre, and the plur. others (Nom. and Ace.) by d'autres or les autres. Ex. : Un autre vous servira, Another one will help you. — Donnez-moi d'autres raisons. Give me some other reasons. 7. Of or from others is rendered ifautrui, and to others, à autrui, as: Par soi-mêtne on peut juger d'autruî. From one*s own self one can judge of others. 391 8. L'un et l'autre, fem. ru7ie et Vautre (pi. les uns et les autres^ pi. fem. les unes et les autres), both. — They agree with the noun they refer to, in gender and number. Ex. : L'UU et l'autre sont allés au concert, Both have gone to the concert. When preceded by a preposition we have to repeat the same in French before each of them, as : Je le ferai pour V une et pour Vautre, I shall do it for both of them {fem.) Ni l'un ni l'autre (fem. ni Vune ni Vautre) requires ne before the verb, as : Je ne le ferai ni pour l'un, ni pour l'autre, I shall do it for neither of them {masc.) 9. L'un l'autre (l'une lautre [fem.]) ; les uns les au- tres; les unes les autres (fem.), one another or each other. L'un, Vune, les uns\ les tmes are always the sub- jects, Vautre, les autres the objects of the sentences. All active verbs must in such cases take the reflective pro- nouns se, nous, vous, although no reflective pronoun is used in English ; as : Ces deux soeurs ^^ aiment l'une l'au- tre^ These two sisters love each other. — Vous vous nuisez l'un à l'autre, You are hurting one another. — Elles par- lent mal l'une de l'autre, They speak ill of each other (fem.). N.B. — Observe that the prepositions must be placed between l'un and l'autre. 10. TV/ has two significations, such and many a (man). In the former it is an adjective and agrees with its noun; in the latter it is used without a substantive. Ex. : Telle 392 était la difficulté, Such was the difficulty. — Tel parle de choses qiiil n'entend pas, Many a man speaks of things which he does not understand. Note. Un tel has also the meaning of so and so, as: Chez Monsieur un tel, at Mr. So and So's. Madame une telle, Mrs. So and So. II. Notice also the expression : II n'y a rien de tel que — or il n'est rien tel que — , There is nothing like. Ex. : // ny a rien de tel cue d'avoir u?ie bonne conscience [kong- syàngs). There is nothing like having a good conscience. Words. Division (/) du temps (dêê- Division vêê'Z^yong dii tàng). Un siècle {sêray-kr), A centur}'. Une année (â^i-nay). A year. l'année passée. last year. l'année prochaine (pro- next 3^ear. shayn), Un mois (niwoàh). A month. Une semaine {sè-mayn), A week. Un jour, une journée. A day. Une heure (//>/ ?ieûr). An hour. Une demi-heure {dë-mêe Half an hour. air). 39» Un quart d'heure {kâr deûr)^ Une heure et demie, Une minute {mëé-nut)y Une seconde (sê-gûngd), Le matin, La matinée, Midi (rnëë-dëe) (m.), L'après-midi, (m.) Le soir [s'woâr)^ La soiree (s'woà-ray), La nuit {nu-éê)^ Minuit {méë-nu-ëë) (w.), Aujourd'hui, Hier {ëë-ayr), -'Avant-hier {â-vàng-iyatr)^ Demain, Après-demain, Le lendemain {làng-dë-7naing)^ Le commencement {côm-màng-së-màng). Le milieu {mëë-lyeû), La fin {faing), Le& saisons {say-zong) f. pl^ Le printemps ( praing-tmig)^ L'été (w.). L'automne {lô-tôn). L'hiver {lëë-vayr) m.^ La belle saison. La mauvaise saison, A quarter of an hour. An hour and a half. A minute. A second. The morning. The forenoon. Noon. The afternoon. The evening. The evening. Night. Midnight. To-day. Yesterday. The day before yesterday. To-morrow. The day after to-morrow. The next day, the morrow. The beginning. The middle. The end. Seasons, Spring. Summer. Autumn. Winter. The fine season. The bad season. 394 Exercise. Omnihis. — Tramway. — Cah. ^ Do you pass ' through the ' rue de Richelieu' ? Yes, sir. — Please put me down' at the 'Palais-Royal.' — Fares,* please. — Would you be kind enough to hand my fare ^ to the conductor ? Would you be so kind to move* a little ? — Take a seat in that corner. — Why do we stop".!* — The street seems to be blocked up with carriages." — Would you be kind enough to give ' the conductor a sign ' to stop ? — Let me get out first. ^'^ — Give me your " liand. — Don't hurry, wait till the 'bus stands quite still^- — Conductor, a connection-ticket" for Passy. — This is too late, sir ; you ought to have spoken when you got in,^* — Have you a connecting-ticket " } Then get out and enter this office. Thè~~D«\nibus for Passy has not yet come in, but it w411 be here in a minute. ^^ — I am very tired ; let us take a cab. — Cabman, here^'! — Stop, please, and turn round." — Drive us to the * Bois.' — On time." — (You will) drive us " through the ' Boulevards, la place de la Concorde and les Champs-Elysées.' — What is your fare," cabman ? — Is the charge for the luggage includ- ed " ? — That is very dear. — Cabman, drive me" to the N . . .hotel, R. . street. — Do you know the hotel ? i) fiacre. — 2) est-ce que vous passez ? — 3) descendez-moi. — 4) Places. — 5) ma place or mon argent. —6) reculer. — 7) s'arrêter. — 8) It seems (il parait) that the street is blocked up (encombrée) of carriages. — 9) défaire signe. — 10) /^premier. — ii)7amain. — 12) attendez que la voiture soit tout à fait arrêtée. — 13) une cor-respondance (need not be paid for extra). — 14) il fallait le dire en montant. — 15) une corre- spondance. — 16) il ne tardera pas à venir. — 17) Cocher, par ici î — 18) tournez. — 19) à l'heure or nous vous prenons à l'heure. — 20) Vous prendrez les Boulevards, &c. — 21) combien vous dois-je? — 22) le prix des bagages est-il compris ? — 23) conduisez-moi. COMPANION TO THE ^eViôed ^erôîon of the Pe-vs/" ||eôtafflcnt. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on tho Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Rerision Committee, WITH SUPPLEMENT BY À MEXBEK OF THE IMEBICIN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revision of the Work and Co>operation of the New Testament. Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Ditference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised New Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passages in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons which influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and^of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Commiitee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighted, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, lays of this book: " Many persons have expressed a desire that, simultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasons tor such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire.... Nowhere else in print can be found a statement so full and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers, New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indispensable. Even scholars who were not at the meeting of the Revisers would have a wearisome work in ^eeking to dis- cover all the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lo»L All this is Set forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligent interest in the Holy Scriptures, will find this liitle book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every meniber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and purpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-clashes." "So valuable, interesting and useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — New York Observer. Paper, 8vo sixe, S5 cents ; Cloth, 16ino, 75 cents* i^*0 For Sale by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K. FUNK AGO., Publishers, 10 & 12 Doy St., N. Y. I . \ N0T1Œ TO SUBSCKIBERS. A SUPPLEMENT CONTAINING 1. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 2. A COMPLETE FRExNCH VOCABULARY. 3. COMMERCIAL AND SOCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 4. ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. &c., &c. WILL BE PUBLISHED IMMEDIATELY. PRICE, 75 CENTS-CLOTH. Subscribers wishing to secure the î^uppLEMENT will PLEASE remit 75 CENTS JO I. k:. :PTJ3sric & oo., 10 & 12 Dey Street. THE t Ci mUt%tknlt 5g$tçîn. A SIMPLE AND PRACTICAL METHOD, ENABLING ANY ONE TO LEARN, WITH SLIGHT EFFORT, TO SPEAK FLUENTLY AND CORRECTLY ^uuli mv\t(m, ^pmli and fftaliait BY DR. RICHARD S. ROSENTHAL, La/f Director of the ^^ Akademie fiir fremde Sprachen'''' in Berlin and Leipzig^ of the '"'' Meistersthaft College'''' in London, and Principal of the "'' Meisterschaft School of Practical Linguistry''^ in New York. FRENCH. IN FIFTEEN PARTS, EACH CONTAINING THREE LESSONS. PART XV. NEW YORK: I. K. FUNK & CO., Publishers, lo AND 12 Dey Street. TERMS. We have arranged with Dr. Rosenthal, the author of the "Meis- terschaft System," for its introduction in America under his own supervision, and he has opened Ihe :|[ristcrsck);t 3^I|ooI of Sradical l^inpistrg FOR NON-RESIDENTS. The studenv does not need to leave his home. The lessons of each language are prepared bv the Professor, and printed and sent in pamphlet shape to each member of the School wher ever he may reside. The course of study for each language — German, French. Italian, or Spanish — makes fifteen pamphlets of three lessons each. All members of the School have THE PRIVILEGE of asking, by letter, questions concerning each lesson, or consulting on any difficulty which may have occurred to them. All exercises corrected and all questions answered by return post by Dr. Rosen- thal or one of his assistants. TERMS OF MEMBERSHIP. Five Dollars is the price for membership in the school for each language. This amount ($5.) entitles the member to receive the fifteen books or pamphlets containing the lessons, also answers to his questions. Return postage for the answer must accompany the question. State distinctly which language, or languages, you desire to study There are no extra charges. The price. Five Dollars, pays for one language ; Ten Dollars for two languages, etc. All exercise^ and questions must be written on a sepaiate sheet of paper, and must state full address of the pupil. Remittances must be made in Post-Office Order or registered letter addressed to I. K. FUNK & CO, to aud 19 Dm/ Strt^t, ,V«-»r York. ^\\t ||(i$tift$* t,tlfes sew- blant]) that you are pleased wùth it. 20. He pretends to be ill. 21. He pretended to be ignorant of it (= not to know anything about it). 22. I am going now to pack my trunk ( faire ma malle). I) Faire part de quelque chose à quelqu'un means to commu- 401 4- Faites faire du café frais. 5. J'ai fait faire du bouillon {bôô-yong) pour vous. 6. Je vie fais faire une robe de soie par le même tail- leur qui a fait la vôtre. 7. Elles se f.nt faire des bottines chez le cordonnier français. 8. Je le lui ferai S2L\'o\Y. 9. Vous^avez /^z/Vat tendre mon^employé. 10. Faites-lui s^\o\\' que je reviendrai demain matin. 11. FereZ'Vous part de cela ^ à votre'^agent. 12. Pourquoi ne leur avez-voiis pas fait part des nou- velles? 13. Il fait des courbettes. 14. Je ne m'abaisserai jamais ^/<:7/;r ^^^ r). — Fut. : Je tairai. — Près Sub;. : Que je taise, que tu taises, qu'il 409 13. Taisez-vous! ^ 15. Chut (shut) ! Silence [sêé-làngs) î Savoir; Dire. I. Savez-vous quelque chose de nouveau {or Qu'y a-t-il de nouveau) ? 3. Je ne sais rien de nouveau. 3. Comment ? vous ne savez pas ce que l'on dit dans toute la ville ? 4. Je n'ai rien^entendu dire. 5. Vous faites semblant {sâng-blâng) de ne pas le savoir. 6» Si j'en savais quelque chose, je vous le dirais.' 7. C'est donc un faux bruit, sans quoi vous devriez le savoir. 8. Qui le dit ^ Tout le monde le dit. 9. Puis-je savoir qui vous l'a dit ? îo. Une personne digne {dêén-yê) de foi. Je le tiens de monsieur N. Connaitre ; Oublier ; se Souvenir. 1. Me connaissez-vous ? 2. Je n'ai pas l'honneur de vous connaître. 3. Comment, vous ne me reconnaissez pas J 4. Je ne puis vous remettre. Votre nom ne me revient pas. taise, etc. — Thus: Se taire, to be silent, —Prei. : Je me tais, I am silent. — Prêt. Je me tus, I was silent. — Perf.: Je me suis lu, I have been silent. — hnperat.: Tais-toi ; taisez*vous, be silent. 410 5- I do not remember having had the honor of meeting you. 6. I beg your pardon ; I remember having had the pleasure of seeing you last winter at a ball given by Mrs. B. 7. Do you remember it ? 8. I remember it very well. 9. So do I ; I shall never forget (= always remember) it. 10. I have not forgotten what you said to me at that time (alors). 11. I cannot recall it ; I have a bad memory {la mémoire ingrate). 12. May I ask you to remind me of it .' FOUNDATION SENTENCE. If the weather is just as cold to-morrow morning as it is to-night, make a fire in my son's room as I am afraid he is ill. 411 5. Je ne me rappelle pas'^avoir^eu cefhonneur. 6. Pardonnez-moi, je me souviens d'avoir eu le plaisir de vous voir l'hiver dernier au bal de M'"®. B. 7. Vous'^en souvient-ill 8. Je m'en souviens très-bien. 9 Moi aussi, je m'en souviendrai toujours. 10. Je n'ai pas'^oublié ce que vous me dites alors. 11. Je ne puis me le rappeler ; j'ai la mémoire ingrate. 12. Oserais-je vous prier de m'en faire resouvenir ?^ FOUNDATION SENTENCE. S'il fait demain matin aussi froid que ce soir, sëSl fay dë-maing mâ-taing ôs-sSë fro-âh kë se swoâre, faites du feu dans la chambre de mon fils parce fait du feû dâng la shâng-br' de mong lëës pSr-sé que je crains qu'il ne soit malade. Jcë je kraing JcëÇl ne swokh malâd. 412 If the weather is just as cold to-morrow morning as it is to-night. If ; whether it makes if it makes to-morrow morning to-morrow morning also; too; likewise; as cold as to-night ; this evening. i) Si belongs to the so-called simple conjunctions. Conjunctions are used to connect either words or sentences. They are either simple or compound ; the simple consist of one word for each clause, the compound are formed of two separate words. Simple Conjunctions, car, for. Et, and. et— et, both — and. aussi, also, too. tantôt — tantôt, sometimes — some- times. ou, or, ou — ou, either — or. plus— plus, the more — the more. />/«> — moins, the more — the less. moins — moins, the less — the less. autant^^autant, as much as. mais, but. toutefois \ however. cependant, \ pourtant, )'et, still, autrement, J .1 , sans cela, \ otl^erwise, else. néanmoins, nevertheless. d'ailleurs, besides, moreover. si, if, whether. sinon, if not 413 SMI fait demain matin aussi froid que ce soir. sêël fay dë-maing mâ-taing ôs-sëë fro-âh kë se svvoâre. Si' il fait "- s'il fait demain matin (m.) demain matin aussi ' froid que' ce soir. quand, when? où, where ? (Toil, whence ? puisque, since, as. lorsque, when, as. quoique (with the Subj.)> though. pourquoi, why? pour, in order to. soit — soit, be it — or. ni — ni, neither — nor. connue, as. com?nent, how ? donc, consequently ; then. ainsi, thus, so, puis ; alors, then. que, that. qtte, than (after a comparative). 2) il fait, il faisait, etc., is used in speaking of the weather ; as, il fait beau, it is beautiful weather. 3) aussi — que ( just) a«; — ns, is used in comparisons, as : II est aussi heureux que son frère. He is just as happy as his brother. — In nega- tive comparisons aussi — que, or si — que mny be used: Nous ne sommes pas si riches (^r aussi riches) que vous, We are not as rich as you. WJ^-j-TJ. J.»,. -.aa« »T» 414 1. What kind of weather is it ? — It is fine weather (It is fine). 2. It is bad weather. 3. It is very fine weather. — The w^eather is splendid. 4. The weather is very bad {or awful ; abominable). 5. The weather is nice (agreeable). 6. The weather is not pleasant. (The weather is dis- agreeable). 7. It is clear. 8. The sky {le temps) is cloudy (overcast). r It is gloomy. 9. < It is dry. ' It is damp. 10. The weather is certain. 11. The weather is uncertain {or changeable). 12. It is pleasant {or mild). — It is stormy. 13. Will it be fine to-day ? (Are we going to have fine weather to-day ?) 14. It looks as if we were going to have fine weather. 15. It looks as if we were going to have bad weather. 16. The weather is growing (^r turning) bad.. 17. It is growing fine. 18. It does not look as if we were going to have fine weather. i) CouvHr, to cover. — Part, pr, : couvrant. — Part. p. : couvert. — See ouvrir. 415 1. Quel temps {tdng) fait-il ? — II fait beau temps {or^ II fait beau). 2. II fait mauvais temps {or^ II fait mauvais). 3. Il fait^un temps magnifique (superbe; splendide ; délicieux). 11 fait^un vilain temps (vêë-iaing-tâng). Il fait^abominable {nàhbV). 5. Il fait bon (agréable). 6. Il ne fait pas bon (or^ Il fait désagréable). 7. Il fait^un temps clair(serein \sê-raing^, 8. Le temps est couvert {koô-vayr)} / Il fait sombre (sôîigbr). 9. } Il fait sec. ' Il fait^humide {tilmêêd). 10. Le temps est constant {kon-stàng). 11. Le temps est variable {or inconstant \yâh-ryàbt , amg- kong-stàng\). 12. Il fait doux {dôô\ — Il fait_,orageux. j Le temps se mettra-t-il au beau aujourd'hui 1 "^' ] Fera-t-il beau aujourd'hui } j Le temps a l'air de vouloir se mettre^au beau. ^' \ On dirait'^ que le temps va se mettre^au beau. ( Il y a apparence {à-pâ-rângs) de mauvais temps. ^* / On dirait qu'il va faire mauvais. 16. Le temps se dérange (or se gâte \^àht\)» 17. Le temps se remet^au beau. 18. Le temps n'a pas l'air de vouloir se mettre^au beau. 2) On dirait, one would think ; on ne le dirait pas, one wonid not believe it. 416 • 19- It is beginning to grow fine again. 20. The weather is clearing up. 21. That's a sign of fair weather. 23. What beautiful weather we are having nowadays. 23. What weather ! [These expressions may be used in regard to good or bad weather.] 24. You want to go out in such weather {or in this weather) ? 25. The barometer points to fair; to rain; to change. 26. The barometer has risen (has fallen). 27. The sky is overcast ; we are certainly going to have rain {de Veau). 28. So much the worse, for {car) I have to make some calls {or to pay some visits). 39. You can put them off {remettre) till to-morrow. 30. But to-morrow we have to go {nous devons aller) to the country with Mr. Godet. Don't you remember that he promised to fetch us provided the weather were fine } 31. Do you think it is going to rain to-day ? T^2. Yes, it is raining already. [Observe the French mode of expressing these phrases.) 2^7^. It rains {or^ It is raining). 34.. It has been raining. 35. It will rain. i) commencer, to begin, is generally followed by à, as : On a com- mencé à jouer. They have begun to play. — But if a certain time is stated, it is followed by de, so as to avoid the repetition of '^ Il tombera de l'eau). tionally, i.e., when thev are preceded by the conjunction si. It I say, for instance : ye crois que son employé est parti, I repre- sent the departure as a fact, I believe he has left. But in the sen- tence : Je ne crois pas que son emploj'é soit parti, I speak of his departure as something uncertain, 2i% something which viay have hap- pened, consequently the Subjunctive must be used. — Pensez-vous ^f//'// puisse faire tout cela? Do )^ou think he can do all that ? Sor- ion'=;, ii vous pensez qu'il fasse beau temps, Let us go out, if you think it will be fine weather. 418 36. It is going to rain. 37. It is raining very fast. 38. It is raining faster and faster {de plus belle). 39. It rains as fast as it can pour (à verse) ; let us get under cover (à couvert). 40. It looks like rain. 41. Do you think it is going to rain ? 42. It does not rain so heavily {a diminue). — It has left off raining. 43. The rain has settled the dust. — All nature has been refreshed by the rain. 44. I am afraid I shall get wet (mouillé). 45. I am wet through and through. — I am wet through to the skin. {Literally: to the bones \^jusqiC aux os\). 46. My clothing {or my dress [ladies']) is soaked through and through. 1) Craindre, to fear. — Part, pi: : craignant (l'n'n-yâfi^if). — Parf. p. : craint {kraing). — Près. : Je crains {kraing), tu crains, il craint, nous craignons (^krJn-yong), vous craignez, etc. — Prêt. : Je craignis ikren- ycc).— Fut : Je zx2Àx\à.x2L\ {kraing-drai). — Thus also: Plaindre, to pity; j-^//a/«^/;v, to complain ; contrai}idre,Xo covc\^ç.\, to constrain. 2) After verbs of permitting, allowing, promising, /eating, rejoicing, etc., the Infinitive with de must follow, if i) the main sentence and the dependent clause have one and the same subject, or if 2) the subject of the dependent clause is a pronoun which has been mentioned al- ready in the main sentence, as : /am afraid /"shall get wet. Je crains d'être mouillé. — Tell him he should write to my father, Dites-lui d'écrire à mon père. I add a full list of these verbs : Accuser, to accuse. achever, to finish. avertir, to inform. s'aviser, to determine. blâmer, to blame. charger, to commission. cesser, to cease. commander, to command. conjurer, to entreat. continuer, to continue. conseiller, to advise. craindre, to fear. défendre, to forbid. dt'pecher {se), to hasten. de'toumer, to deter. différer, to differ. 419 36. Il va pleuvoir {or^ Il va tomber de l'eau). 37. Il pleut bien fort. 38. La pluie tombe de plus belle, 39. Il pleut^à verse ; mettons-nous^à couvert. 40. Le temps estjà, la pluie. 41. Croyez-vous qu'il pleuve {or que nous^ayons de l'eau) ? 42. La pluie a diminué (La pluie a cessé). 43. La pluie a abattu la poussière. — La pluie a rafraîchi {shêë) X.o\xX.Q la nature {nà-tur). 44. Je crains^ d'être^ mouillé (niôô-yêK). 45. Je suis tout mouillé. — Je suis trempé jusqu'aux"^os {^jus-kô-zo). 46. Mes vêtements {vay-te-màng) sont tout mouillés. dire, to tell. dispenser, to excuse. désespérer, to lose hope. dissuader, to dissuade. écrire, to write. empêcher, to hinder. s'^ empresser, to hasten. entreprendre, to undertake. essayer, to try. éviter, to avoid. feindre, to feign. féliciter, to congratulate hâter (j^), to hasten. jurer, to swear. menacer, to threaten. mériter^ to deserve. 7îégliger, to neglect. nier, to deny. offrir, to offer. omettre, to omit. ordonner, to order. oublier, to forget, permettre, to permit. persuader, to persuade. plaindre, to pity. plaindre {se), to complain. prescrire, to prescribe. presser, to urge. /nVr, to pray, to ask. promettre, to promise. proposer, to propose. recommander, to recommend. refuser, to refuse. regretter, to regret. réjouir {se), to rejoice. remercier, to thank, .r^ repentir, to repent. reprocher, to reproach. résoudre, to resolve. risquer, to run risk. sommer, to summon. soupçonner, to suspect. supplier, to beg, request. tâcher, to endeavor. trembler, to tremble. vanter {se), to boast. 420 47- My hat is in a terrible condition (in an awful state). 48. What an object you look ! 49. I was surprised {or overtaken) by a sudden rainstorm {une averse). 50. And you had neither an umbrella nor an overcoat ? 51. The sky looked so fine when I went out that I did not take any precaution. 52. Yes, but the weather was sultry {lourd) and the heat stifling {la chaleur accablante), and there were those little clouds on the horizon whicli foretell a storm. 53. I fancied they would blow off. 54. You counted without your host. [French proverb.] 55. I am afraid it is going to rain. 56. It looks like a thunderstorm. 57. How hot it is to-day! It has not been so warm all summer. 58. I am afraid we are going to have a thunderstorm ; it is going to rain at once. 59. That is nothing. That will soon pass over. 60. The weather is clearing up. The sun is shining again. It is going to be fine. 61. The sun is shining. i) ni — ni {nêc) must always be accompanied by ne. 2) "WiQ present participle with en denotes a) either a means, or h) a simultaneous action, i.e., an action during the transaction of which another one is acted by the sa -ne subject ; it is always invariable, and corresponds to the English present Participle preceded by the pre- positions b\\ in, on, or 7vhile ; or it is sometimes rendered by the sim- ple Participle without preposition. Ex.: II riait en me regardant. He was laughing while he looked at me. — On se forme Tesprit en Usant de bons livres, We form our miods by reading good books. 3) The verbs avoir peur, craindre, and t>cmhlcr require the particle ne before the verb in the Subjunctive Mood, but only when these verbs themselves are affirmative or tiegative-interrogative. Ex.: 421 47» Mon chapeau est bien arrangé {âr-ràng-Jay). 48. Comme vous voilà fait ! 49. J'ai été surpris par^une averse. 50. Vous n'aviez donc ni ^ parapluie ni paletot ? 51. Le ciel (syél) était si beau que je n'avais pris^aucune précaution {prêh-kd-syong) en partant,^ 52. Oui, mais le temps était lourd, la chaleur accablante, et il y avait au ciel de ces petits nuages {nu-âhje) qui annoncent l'orage {ân-ndngs lô-ràhjé). 53. Je croyais qu'ils se dissiperaient. 54. Vous^avez compté {kong-tëh) sans votre^hôte. 55. Je crains qu'il ne pleuve.^ 56. Le temps est^à l'orage. 57. Qu'il fait chaud aujourd'hui ! Il n'a pas'^encore fait si chaud de Vété.^ 58. Je crains que nous n'ayons de l'orage ; il va pleuvoir tout-à-l'heure. 59. Ce n'est rien. Ça va être bientôt passé. 60. Le temps s'éclaircit. Voilà le soleil qui paraît.^ Il va faire beau. 61. Il fait du soleil (sô-le-ye). Je crains qu'il ne vienne. Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne vienne ? But if the sentence be simply negative or simply interrogative y ne is not used, as : Je ne crains pas quil vienne. Craignez-vous qu'il vienne ? 4) de l'été, the whole summer through ; de la nuit, the whole night. 5) Paraître, X0 2i^'^ezx.— Part, pr.: paraissant.— /'ar/. j!)./ paru. — Près.: Je parais, tu parais, il paraît, nous paraissons, vous paraissez, ils paraissent (/^-r/.O. — i'r^/. .• Je parus, tu parus, il parut, etc. — Fut. : Je paraîtrai. — Près. Subj. . Que je paraisse. — Thus also : Ap- paraître, to appear ; disparaître, to disappear ; reparaître, to re- appear. 422 62. There is every indication of hot weather. 6^. I feel warm. — I feel very warm. 64. How warm it is! — The heat is fairly choking (^r overpowering), 65. The air is parching (brûlant) ; I am dying with heat. 66. One can scarcely bear the heat. {Literally : One does not know what to do on account of the heat.) 67. It makes one perspire (transvn-er). 68. Let us step into the shade {à l\inbre). 69. Let us go into the shade. — It is shady here. 70. It is windy. — It is very windy. —There is a cold wind. 71. From which quarter is the wind ? 72. The wind has changed {or turned]. 73. It is pleasant for walking to-day. 74. What do you think of the weather .? A little rain would not be amiss {ne ferait pas de mal). 75. We need rain. 76. Don't you think it is very warm weather for the season of the year ? 77. Yes, this is one of the warmest springs I can re- member. 78. The sun is as hot as in the midst of summer. 79. I am afraid we are going to have a thunderstorm to- day. So. What wind ! It thunders alreadv ! Do vou hear ? 423 ( Il y a apparence de chaleur (shà-leûr). i On dirait qu'il va faire chaud. 63. J'ai chaud. — J'ai extrêmement (or excessivement) chaud. 64. Ah ! qu'il fait chaud ! — Il fait^une chaleur étouf- fante ! 65. L'air est brûlant ; je meurs de chaleur {or de chaud). 66. On ne sait que faire de chaleur. 67. Cela vous fait transpirer {U'àngs-pëë-rëK). 68. Mettons-nous à l'ombre (long-br). 69. Marchons à l'ombre. — Ici il fait de l'ombre. 70. Il fait du vent {vâng). — Il fait beaucoup de vent. — Il fait^un vent froid {froâJi). 71. Quel vent fait il ? {01% Quel vent_avons-nous) ? 72. Le vent^a changé {or tourné). 73. Il fait^un temps très-agréable pour se promener au- jourd'hui. 74. Que dites-vous du temps.? Un peu de pluie ne ferait pas de mal. 75. Nous'^avons besoin de pluie. 76. Ne trouvez-vous pas qu'il fait bien chaud pour la saison {sai-zong) ? 77. Oui, ce printemps {praing-tàng') est^un des plus chauds dont je me souvienne. 78. Le soleil est^aussi chaud qu'au milieu {mëë-lêë^cû) de l'été. 79. Je crains que nous n'ayons aujourd'hui de l'orage. 80. Quel tourbillon {tôôr-bëë-yong) ! Il tonne déjà. En- tendez-vous ? 424 8i. I just ^avv a flash of lightning. 82. The thunder roars. 83. What clap of thunder ! the lightning has struck. Now it begins to rain. 84. Let us escape as fast as possible into this house. 85. God be thanked ! the storm is over I 86. After the rain follows the fine weather. [French proverb. ] 87. There is a draught here. 88. It is dusty. 89. It hails. 90. The hail has broken the window-panes (les vitres). 91. It is foggy. 92. It is quite fresh. — It is cold. 93. I feel cold. 94. It is freezing. — It freezes hard. 95. We had a hard frost last night (cette mdt). 96. We'll have a cold winter. 97. I am trembling with the cold. 98. It is growing colder. — It is growing warmer. 99. How many degrees have we ? We have 3 degrees below zero. 100. It snows. — It is snowing hard. loi. It is thawing. — The ice is broken. — The snow is melting. 102. It is dirty. 425 8i. Je viens de voir un^éclair. 82. Le tonnere gronde. S;^. Quel éclat de tonnerre ! la foudre est tombé. Voilà qu'il commence à pleuvoir ! 84. Sauvons-nous bien vite (vëë^) dans cette maison. 85. Dieu merci ! l'orage est passé. S6. Après la pluie le beau temps. j II y a un courant (rang) d'air ici. i Nous sommes^ici entre deux^airs. 88. Il fait de la poussière. 89. Il grêle (or, Il tombe de la grêle). 90. La grêle a cassé les vitres {vëë-tr). 91. Il fait du brouillard (brôô-yàré). 92. Il fait frais. ^ — Il fait froid. 93. J'ai froid. 94. Il gèle. — Il gèle forte {pr^ Il gèle tout de bon). 95. Nous'^avons'^eu une forte gelée cette nuit {nii-èë). 96. Nous^'aurons^'un froid^hiver {ëë-vayr), 97. Je tremble (trâng-bV) de froid. 98. Le froid augmente {inângt). — Le froid diminue. 99. Combien de degrés'^avons nous ? — Nous^'avons trois degrés de froid (or^ Nous^ avons trois degrés au- dessous de zéro (zay-ro). 100. Il neige. — Il neige à gros flocons [Jlô-kông). loi. Il dégèle. — La glace s'est rompue (rong-pu), — La neige fond {fongd). 102. Il fait sale (sâhl) (or^ Il fait de la boue). 426 2. But before doing so make a fire in my son's room, as I am afraid he is ill. But before (Adverb) make (Imperat) some fire in the room of my son because I am afraid that he is ill 1. Please make a fire before bringing me the warm water. 2. If there is no fire in our bed-room, make one. 3. I cannot act otherwise {autrement). 4. I shall do it one way or another. ^. I have done mv best. 427 Mais aiiparayant faites du feu dans la chambre may zô-pâ-râ-vâng fate dii feû dâng là shâng-br' de mon fils parce que je crains qu'il ne soit malade. de mong fëSs par-së-kè je craing këël ne swoâh mâh-lâd. Mais auparavant faites du feu dans la chambre de mon fils parce que je crains qu'il ne soit malade. 1. Faites du feu, je vous prie, avant de m'apporter de l'eau chaude. 2. S'il n'y a pas de feu dans notre chambre-à-coucher, faites-en. 3. Je ne puis faire autrement {oh-tr màng) , 4. Je le ferai de manière ou d'autre. 5. J'ai fait pour le mieux {or de mon mieux). 428 6. Do unto others as you would they should do unto you. 7. You can do what you like. (Vou may act as you please.) 8. Have you anything to do ? 9. Do what you please. 10. He has done it on his own responsibility. 1 1. That shall be done {or will be done) at once. 12. He does it very clumsily. 13. That happens sometimes. 14. It is getting late. 15. How does it happen that ... . .•* 16. I am not afraid of his coming. 17. I am afraid he is not coming. 18. Is there anything to fear {or to be afraid of) } 19. It is to be feared that this may happen {que cela n'arrive). 20. I am afraid he will not succeed. 21. I am afraid my brother will loose his suit {procès). 429 6. Faites^aux^autres ce que vous voudriez qu'on vous fît {fée). 7. Vous ferez comme^il vous plaira {or comme^il vous semblera bon [sàng-blë-râh bông\)- 8. Avez-vous quelque chose à faire ? 9. Faites comme vous voudrez. 10. Il l'a fait de son chef {or de son^autorité privée \^prëê-vay]). 11. Cela va être fait {or achevé, or fini, or terminé). 12. Il le fait très-gauchement {gôsKmâng). 13. Cela se fait quelquefois. 14. Il se fait tard. 15. Comment se fait-il que .... ? 16. Je ne crains pas qu'il vienne. 17. Je crains qu'il ne vienne pas. 18. Y a-t-il quelque chose à craindre ? 19. Il est à craindre que cela n'arrive {nâr-rëëv). 20. J'ai peur qu'il ne réussisse pas {këêl ne ray-iis-sïs pah). 21. Je crains que mon frère ne perde son procès {say). Le IM 03 COMPANION TO THE ^evîôed perôion of the pc-a/" ^eôtament. Explaining the Reasons for the Changes Made on the Authorized Version. BY ALEXANDER ROBERTS, D.D., Member of the English Revision Committee. WITH SUPPLEMENT BY À MEHBEtt OP THE AMERICAN COMMITTEE. Containing a Brief History of the Revision of the Work and Co-operation of the New 1 cstament. Companies, of the Points of Agreement and Difference, and an Explanation of the Appendix to the Revised i-ew Testament. ALSO, A FULL TEXTUAL INDEX, Being a Key to Passsges in which Important Changes have been Made. This book, having been carefully prepared by Members of both Revision Committees, carries official weight. It shows what changes have been made, and also the reasons whi :h influenced the revisers in making them. It will be difficult to judge of the merits of the revision without the aid of this Companion volume. Our edition is printed by special arrangement with the English publishers. It is well known that, by an arrangement between the two Committees of Revision, the changes suggested by the American Com- mittee, but which were not adopted by the English Revisers, are published as an Appendix to the Revised New Testament. The Companion volume is an explanation of all the changes adopted by both committees, and of those suggested by the American Committee, but not assented to by the English Commiitee, in their final revision. The book will be indispensable to a right understanding of the revision. This cheap edition of the combined books, although authorized and copyrighîed, will be sold for 25 cents in paper, and 75 cents in cloth — sent postage free. TESTIMONIALS. T. W. Chambers, D.D., a Member of the American Committee of Revision, says of this book: " Many persons have expressed a desire that, limultaneously with the issue of the Revised New Testament, there should appear an authentic explanation of the reasoni for such changes as will be found in its pages. The work of Dr. Roberts is exactly fitted to meet this desire Nowhere e >-e in print can be found a statement so full and exact. It gives all needed information, and does it in an unexceptional way." C. F. Deems, D.D., Pastor of the Church of the Strangers, New York, writes: "The Companion to the Revised Version seems to me almost indi'-pensable. Even scholar! who were not at the meeting of the Revisers wou'd have a wearisome work in seeking to dis- cover ail the changes made, and to ordinary readers very much of the labor would be lost. ....All this IS s t forth by Dr. Roberts with admirable perspicuity. Those who have any intelligent interest in the Holy Scriptures, will find thisliule book absorbingly interesting. I shall urge every men.ber of the church of which I am pastor to give it a careful reading, and 1 urpose to introduce it as a text-book in our Bible-classes." "So valuable, inteiesting jnd useful is this publication, that we advise every one who wishes to know the why and wherefore of the revision, to obtain it immediately." — Isitxu Y^rk Observer. Faper, 8vo size, 35 cents ; Clotli, IGmo, 75 cents. ;^** For Sale by Booksellers and Newsdealers, or sent postage-paid, on receipt of price, by I. K.FUNK A CO., Publishers, I0& 12 Dey St., N. Y. y NOTICE TO SUBSCRIBERS. CONTAINING 1. KEY TO THE EXERCISES. 2. A COMPLETE FRENCH VOCABULARY. 3. COMMERCIAL AND SOCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 4. ADDITIONAL GRAMMATICAL PECULIARITIES. .tr., &c. WILL BE PUBLISHED IMMEDIATELY. PRICE, 75 CENTS-CLOTH. Subscribers wishing to secure the Supplement will pl.eask remit 75 cents to I. k:. iFTJisrK: & co., 10 & 12 Dey Street. UBRARY OF CONGRESS iitiniiiniiiiii'iiii I 003 121 467 1 M ■^j i'îiii W i.